V<^ \%^^ 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-S) 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 <i^ 
 
 l6 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 I^|2j8 |2.5 
 «■ K^ ill 2.2 
 ^ US. 12.0 
 
 m 
 
 U III 1.6 
 
 Hiotographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, H.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 873-4503 
 
 fV 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 ^\^ ^\ Wk\ 
 
 "O' 
 
 
 <1> 
 
I 
 
 CIHM 
 Microfiche 
 Series 
 ([\1onograplis) 
 
 ICMH 
 
 Collection de 
 microfiches 
 (monographies) 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
 I 
 
Technical anrt Bibliographic Notes / Notes techniques et bibliographiques 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original 
 copy available for filming. Features of this copy which 
 may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any 
 of the images in the reproduction, or which may 
 significantly change the usual method of filming, are 
 checked below. 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 
 
 I I Covers damaged/ 
 
 D 
 
 Couverture endommag^ 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restauree et/ou pellicula 
 
 I I Cover title missing/ 
 
 n 
 
 Le titre de couverture manque 
 
 Coloured maps/ 
 
 Caites gdographiques en couleur 
 
 [~~^ Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 
 D 
 
 
 Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 
 Planches et/ou illustrations en cnuleur 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 Relie avec d'autres documents 
 
 □ Tight bindi \q may cause shadows or distortion 
 along interior margin/ 
 
 La reliure serree peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distorsion le long de la marge interieure 
 
 D 
 
 n 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may appear 
 within the text. Whenever possible, these have 
 been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties 
 lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
 mais, lorsque cela etait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas ete filmees. 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentaires supplementaires: 
 
 L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur excmplaire qu'il 
 lui a eti possible de se procurer. Les details de cet 
 exemplaire qui sont peut-«tre uniques du point de vue 
 bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une i-nage 
 reproduite. ou qui peuvent exiger une modification 
 dans la methode normale de f ilmage sont indiques 
 ci-dessous. 
 
 □ Coloured pages/ 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 □ Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommagees 
 
 □ Pages restored ard/or laminated/ 
 Pages restaurees et/ou pelliculies 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 Pages decolorees, tachetees ou piquees 
 
 ^/ 
 
 Pages detached/ 
 Pages detachees 
 
 Showthrough/ 
 ansparence 
 
 0" 
 
 □ Quality of print varies/ 
 Qualite inegale de I'impression 
 
 □ Continuous pagination/ 
 Pagination continue 
 
 □ Includes index(es)/ 
 Comprend un (des) index 
 
 Title on header taken from:/ 
 Le titre de TentCte provient: 
 
 □ Title page of issue 
 Page de titre de la 
 
 I I Caption of issue/ 
 
 livraison 
 
 itre de depart de la livraison 
 
 ead/ 
 
 ique (periodiques) de la livraison 
 
 □ Masthead/ 
 Gener 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est filme au taux de reduction indique ci-dessous. 
 
 10X 14X ,8jj 
 
 T 
 
 12X 
 
 16X 
 
 22X 
 
 26 X 
 
 30X 
 
 J 
 
 20X 
 
 24 X 
 
 28X 
 
 J 
 
 22 1 
 
u'il 
 
 :et 
 
 de vue 
 
 e 
 
 tion 
 
 es 
 
 The copy lllmed here has heen rnproduceci thanks 
 TO the generosity of: 
 
 National Library of Canada 
 
 The images appearing here era the best quality 
 possible considering the condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
 or illustiated impression. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol -^ (meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in ons exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper lef i hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams uiustrate the 
 method: 
 
 L'exemplaire fllm6 fut reprodult grSce d la 
 gAnirositd de: 
 
 Bibliothdque nationale du Canada 
 
 Les images suivantes ont 6x6 reproduites avec le 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et 
 de la nettet6 de l'exemplaire film*, et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Les exemplaires originaux dont la coiiverture en 
 papier est imprim^e sont film6s en commenpant 
 par le premier plat et en termlnant soit par la 
 dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le si^cond 
 plat, selon i^^ cas. Tous les autres exemplaires 
 origiriaux sont filmds en commengant par la 
 premidre pege qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration et on termlnant par 
 la dernidre page qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la 
 dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le 
 cas: le symbols — ^ signifie "A SUIVRE" le 
 symbole V signifie "FIN". 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre 
 filmds A des taux de r6duction diffdrents. 
 Lorsque lu document est trop grand pour dtre 
 reproduit en un seul clich6. 11 est tilm6 d pastir 
 de Tangle sup6rieur gauche, de gauche d droite. 
 et de haut en bas. en prenant le nombre 
 d'images ndceosaire. Les diagrammes suivants 
 illustrent la mdthode. 
 
 32 X 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 S 
 
 6 
 
PREFACE, 
 
 This manual has been drawn up for the use of the 
 Cadets of the Royal Military College of Canada. The 
 first five chapters on Practical Astronomy embrace that 
 portion of the subject with which all Land Surveyors in 
 this country ought to be familiar. The remaining chap- 
 ters, together with the part of the work which treats of 
 Geodesy, touch on the more important parts of the ad- 
 ditional course, as regards those subjects, laid down by 
 Government for candidates for the degree of Dominion 
 Topographical Surveyor. It has become absolutely 
 necessary to draw up some compilation of this kir' be- 
 cause, while many of the Cadets are anxious to v. ify 
 themselves as far as possible in the above-mentio,.od 
 course, the number of different books they would have 
 had to refer to in order to obtain the requisite knowledge 
 would have entailed on them a heavy expense. In order 
 to make the work as cheap as possible the number of 
 diagrams has been cut down to a minimum, it being in- 
 tended to supply the place of expensive plates of instru- 
 ments ct cetera by lecture illustrations. The author has 
 also made the higher portion of the Astronomical course 
 
03 lU'f 
 
 IV 
 
 Preface. 
 
 as brief as possible. It will be found treated in the 
 fullest manner in Chauvenet's Astronomy. 
 
 Geodesy being both a difficult and a very extensive sub- 
 ject no attempt has been made to write anythinj,' like a 
 treatise on it. All that has been aimed at has been to 
 give a sketchy account of its most salient points, adding 
 a few details here and there. The student who wishes to 
 pursue the subject further is referred to standard works, 
 such as Clarke's Geodesy. 
 
 The author has to acknowledge having made more or 
 less use of the following: 
 
 Chauvenet's Astronomy, Puissant's Gdodt<sie, Clarke's 
 Geodesy, Frome's Trigonometrical Surveying, Loomis' 
 Practical Astronomy, Gillespie's Higher Surveying, 
 Deville's Examples of Astronomic and Geodetic Calcula- 
 tions, the U. S. Naval Text P>ook on Surveying, and 
 Jeffers' Nautical Surveying. He has also to thank Lieut.- 
 Colonel Kensington, R.A., for valuable assistance in in- 
 vestigating some doubtful formulas. 
 
 I 
 
 Kingston, Cadada,) 
 January, 1883. [ 
 
 I 
 
I 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 PRACTICAL ASTRONOMY. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Idea of the great sphere 
 "declination circle,' 
 tude." "declination 
 "sensible horizon 
 
 General view of the universe. The fixed stars. Their classification 
 magnitudes, and distances, The sun. The planets. Their rela- 
 tive sizes and distances from the sun. Apparent motions of the 
 heavenly bodies. Their real motions. Motion of the earth with 
 reference to the sun. The solar and sidereal dav. Mean and 
 apparent solar time. The equation of time. Sidereal time. 
 The sidereal clock 
 
 CHAPTER n. 
 Meaning of the terms "pole," "meridian " 
 "hour circle," "zenith," "latitude," "longi- 
 ' "right ascension," "altitude," "azimuth " 
 , , ,. . •, "rational horizon," "parallels of latitude'" 
 declination parallels," "circumpolar star," "transit," "paral- 
 lax. Refraction The Nautical Almanac. Sidereal time. The 
 celestial globe. Illustration of the different co-ordinates on the 
 great sphere 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 Uses of practical astronomy to the surveyor. Instruments emploved 
 in the field^ Their particular uses. Corrections to be applied to 
 an observed altitude. Cause of the equation of time Given the 
 sidereal time at a certain instant to find the mean time To find 
 the mean time at which a given star will he on the meridian 
 Given the local mean time at any instant to find the sidere.il time 
 Illustrations of sidereal time. To find the li<,iir angle of a "iven' 
 star at a given meridian. To find the ine,-.n time by .•-niaralti- 
 tudes of a fixed star, To find the local m..an tinu. by an !.bserved 
 altitude of a heavenly body. To find the time by a meridian 
 transit of a heavenly body _ , 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 II 
 
 22 
 
VI 
 
 Contents. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 Sun dials. Horizontal dials. Vertical dials 
 
 CHAPTER VI. ''^ 
 
 iS''TL'^lniH?P?' ?^ M'"onieter. The Reading Micro- 
 scope. The Spirit Level. The Chronometer. The Electro 
 Chronograph. The Sextant. The Simple Reflecting cTrcie" 
 Jircle !r""^ '"^'^'"""S ^''■'='«- The^PrismaS R^flectilTg 
 
 36 
 
 66 
 
 77 
 
 Tt, . u, ^ CHAPTER VII. 
 
 anerto,„fde,m,onon ,h= ialilude, V p=r™al e,;S. 
 CHAPTEH VIII, 
 
 f SI/ £te,. ^^.r o","," as'of °,L :sii; 
 =;. '^is'.rc'o^r:'.'!'.''.";. . '!!■'. r *.'!r .'! '"•™; 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 '^'"''Jlrn' .•"^'^°'^^ °f finding the latitude.-By a single altitude 
 h^ ^ "^ -H- """"''S "'"^' ^y observations of the pole star ou"of 
 the meridian. By circum-meridian altitudes. °. g^ 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 Interpolation by .second difterences. E.xamples. To find the Green- 
 moon'!!n': *■'"" ^corresponding to a givL right ascension of the 
 To finH .h^7'" ^,^y,- ^"t^rpolation by diflerences of any order 
 IoLS. H /°"g""^« by moon-culminating stars. To find the 
 longitude by lunar distances 
 
 T fi j.u ,. , CHAPTER XI. 
 
 on /h/if^P '"'^V^"^ ''?"'■ ^"^'^^ Of a given heavenly body when 
 heav/nlv°hT- T° '?"d the equatorial horizontal parallax of a 
 Tn finJ^.h ^^'i;" g'.^«" distance from the centre of the earth. 
 10 find the parallax in altitude, the earth being regarded as a 
 (^nZ\ ^'f 'c^'^'op!'--^- Differential variationsof co-ordinates 
 thP H^ K '"]^'\ '."«'j"^l't''^s in the altitudes when finding 
 hP tT ^ ^'^."''J altitudes. Effect of errors in the data upon 
 lutl computed from an altitude. Effect of errors of zenith 
 r,i,l '•^^''''"f'°"i ^"d time upon the latitude found by cir- 
 cum-mendian altitudes. The probable error joj 
 
 33 
 
 89 
 
Contents. 
 
 Vil 
 
 PART II. 
 
 GEODESY. 
 
 _ » 
 
 III 
 
 _,. . ^ CHAPTER I. 
 
 cfr^'rcs ,!? V""," °Wate spheroid-proved by measurements 
 
 ,, , . CHAPTER H. 
 
 aSiZ'''}-'- ^^'^'"J^'^dop.ed for mapping country Tri- 
 
 „ . , CHAPTER HI. 
 
 cal excess. Correcting the a ■• , ","' . V"' P'^ne. The spheri- 
 sides of the triaSs The n- '; , .A !^"^i^- Calculating the 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 the earth. F^/rueH^seS «K'd"°ul oHhti^'"'^ °' 
 sphere described with radiusequaltoX normal of *hV?rf»,^'"''-7 
 Reduction of a difference of lafit ,ri» ^^ .u ^ ■, spheroid. 
 responding difference of Lf.H the spheroid to the cor- 
 
 ili^on Tj^iS^i'^^^A ins 
 .he la,ii„d= o onfj^'i'n,, S aziZh of'?;/,'"""' '"«'"'''« 
 
 133 
 
 -■l*fete«_„ 
 
vrii 
 
 ^'ontents. 
 
 'n fho North A 
 
 '"" "10 Uffariia .,. 
 
 I , ['"'J Hie area 
 ""sets to a parallel 
 
 ''hodsofclelineatin ^"AI'TEK V N5 
 
 J'>nom,.(r,v,i . ... <^'"APTl<:i< VI »C0 
 
 ''>iK"nomeincal lev..ir *^'"'^'"I'KK VI 
 
 '■■I"' «M of ,1,5 . CHAM-g,, v,V 
 
 '.'"-• Pen,i„l,„„ ninsri ■■"'■ ''" '""y ascemin ^ ""'' "''-' «'me of 
 
 182 
 
 '75 
 
Devilles 
 "if area 
 parallels 
 parallel 
 
 '45 
 
 actions, 
 cator's, 
 
 i66 
 
 above 
 Ke- 
 ; used 
 di/ler- 
 i. and 
 d tile 
 To 
 erva- 
 
 »7J 
 
 the 
 
 »rce 
 idu- 
 e of 
 1 of 
 ven 
 
 !0f 
 
 ir's 
 er- 
 .. 182 
 
NOTE TO PAGE 52. 
 
 By drawing a figure it can be easily shown that, in the 
 case of a horizontal dial, ii <p is the latitude, P the hour 
 angle, and a the angle the corresponding hour line makes 
 with the meridian line, then : 
 
 sin y)=cot P tan a 
 or tan a -siq f tan P. 
 
 Similarly, in the case of a dial on a vertical wall facing 
 south, ^ 
 
 tan a=cos <p tan P. 
 In the latter case the angle a is measured from a ver- 
 tical line on the wall. The stile is, of course, set parallel 
 to the polar axis. 
 
 We can thus find the hour lines for each hour, for any 
 given latitude, by solving these equations. 
 
 L 
 
 ,4r 
 
 fA-t/-<^-<C ' \r c 
 
 V 
 
 P a A 
 
 lie 
 
 <iL.r^ 
 
 ^<^ yv. 
 
 ^^: 
 
Part I. 
 
 PRACTICAL ASTRONOMY. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 GENERAL VIEW OF THE VISIBLE UNIVERSE. THE FIXED 
 STARS. THE SOLAR SYSTEM. APPARENT AND REAL 
 MOTIONS OF THE HEAVENLY BODIES. DIFFERENT 
 METHODS OF RECKONING TIME. 
 
 The visible universe, outside our earth, comprises the 
 sun, rnoon. planets, fixed stars, milky way, nebute. shoot- 
 mg^stars, and the zodiacal light, besides an occasional 
 
 The comets shooting stars, and zodiacal light will not 
 
 tlT 7 1"'^' 'u '"" ^'^ '""^y ^-y - 'the nebut 
 (white cloudy patches) when examined with powerful tele- 
 scopes generally resolve themselves into clusters of 
 separate stars; a few nebulae, however, still retaining their 
 cloud-hke appearance. ^ 
 
 The fixed stars, as they are called, are doubtless suns, 
 scattered irregularly (or more properly in clusters) through 
 
The Fixed Stars. 
 
 space. They are classified by astronomers into magni- 
 tudes, the bnghtest being those of the ist magnitude. 
 Those of the 6th magnitude are about the smallest visible 
 to the naked eye, those below that si^e being only visible 
 through telescopes. Although differing so much in bright' 
 ness, the most powerful telescope fails to show theni of 
 any measurable size, and they all appear mere points of 
 lifi:h . Their brightness, as seen by us, depends, probabh- 
 partly on their distances, partly on their si.e, and partiv' 
 on their natural brilliancy, while that of a few 
 of them vanes at regular intervals. The colour of the 
 stars also varies, inclining in some to white, in others 
 to red, blue, or green. Some stars are connected in pairs 
 
 tamed by the spectroscope that the elements present in 
 the sun and stars are identical with those composing 
 our earth ; at least no new ones have yet been discovered 
 
 tJJrT"^ ^Tir^^'^ ^y '^'' '"^'^"^^ '"^^ •^^"stella- 
 tions, of which the Great Bear and Orion are instances; 
 
 and a number of the most remarkable stars received 
 special Arabic names, e.g., Arcturus and Aldebaran. The 
 stars composing a constellation are catalogued according 
 to their brightness, the Greek letters being used to dis 
 tinguish them. Thus Aldebaran is a Tauri, and the two 
 stars of that constellation next in brightness are /? and r 
 Taun. When the Greek alphabet is exhausted English 
 etters are used, and finally numbers. Thus we have 
 h Virginis and 51 Cephei. The stars are numbered 
 not according to their brightness, but in the order of thei^ 
 right ascension. 
 
 The distances of the fixed stars from the earth and from 
 each other are so great as to be almost beyond human 
 conception. It was for long believed that they could not 
 be measured. It was, however, eventually found that in 
 the case of some of them, by taking a line through space 
 
Their distance. 
 
 joining opposite points of the earth's orbit as a base, and 
 the star as the apex of a very acute-angled triangle, the angles 
 adjacent to the base could be measured and the acute angle 
 thus determined. The length of the base being known 
 gives the star's distance. To give an idea how far off the 
 nearest star is it may be mentioned that a ray of light 
 would pass round the earth (about 24,900 miles) in a 
 quarter of a second ; it takes ^ minutes to traverse the 
 93 millions of miles from the sun to the earth aid \i 
 years to reach us from the star. And yet, could we be 
 transported to that star, we should still see all the other 
 familiar constellations and stars apparently in exactly the 
 same positions as we see them here. So vast are the dis- 
 tances that the change of position of the observer would 
 have about as much effect on that of the stars as would 
 an interchange of two adjoining grains of sand on a laree 
 table covered with them. 
 
 The nearest star, as at present known, is a Centauri 
 which IS 200,000 times farther off than the sun. The ap- 
 proximate distances of a few others, in terms of the num- 
 ber of years it takes their light to reach us, are as follows : 
 i? Centauri ' 6+ v^arc 
 
 61 cygni ::::;: fy^^^^- 
 
 Sirius 'jg 
 
 ^^^^yo'^ '•■i-;:;;;:::::::::::::.i6 
 
 Arcturus j^ 
 
 Vega ..!.!!!!!".'.!!;!; 16 
 
 PoleStar ZZ^:^ 
 
 About 100.000 stars have been catalogued altogether. 
 The number visible with the naked eye is about 15,000 
 In latitude 50^^ north only about 2,000 can be thus seen 
 at any one time. 
 
 Our sun is only one of the stars, and the latter, though 
 called fixed," are in reality all moving according to the 
 laws of dynamics. What these motions are we cannot 
 tell, as we do not yet know ihe manner in which the 
 
The Planets. 
 
 masses are distributed through space If h..\ 
 
 been ascertained, not only .ha^ Z^lr. 1^^ ITZZ 
 
 '„!: *"= ^""^s are, as a rule, the centres of planetarv 
 
 o tshaS^h r ' "'" °f d-velopmen, permitting 
 oi Its habitation by hvmg creatures. Our own solar «.. 
 
 lupUer P!i"f .'■'™'""« between the orbits of Mars and 
 is a ocus c P'^7'= ""^'^ '■■ ="'P^-^. of which the sun 
 ■s a focus Several of them have moons or satellites and 
 all, .nclud.ng the sun, revolve on their own axes 
 
 an airof 7- TZ' ^^ °'^'' '' '"=""^<' '» o-"^ af 
 angle ot 7 . Looking down on the plane of the «= 
 
 em from its northern side, the direction^f .he Lotfolf 
 
 Xetrdran'it"' '7 V' "'^""- -»""= 
 
 pmnets, and of all its members including the sun) rn.,nH 
 
 from it about 60 .tdii of te earth "MarT" *f' '"' 
 four, Saturn eight. Uranus fouV:"' 'iept^ rne^"-^;: 
 dtances of the planets from the sun are near^ i„ the 
 foUowins proportion: Mercury i, Venus ., the Ear^ 
 a 6 Mars4, Jup.ter 13, Saturn .5, Uranus 50, Neptune 80 
 
 Tnd thaH V ^•''^"'^^-"•y of Mercury! a littLmore' 
 and that of Venus a little less, than that of the earth 
 
 Mars Ath. Saturn ith, Uranus ith, and Neptune 1th. 
 
 To compare their relative sizes ; if we took a globe four 
 fee, in diameter ,0 represent the sun, the moo„lo„u ^' 
 about the size of a grain of shot, Mercury of a bTcksho^ 
 
Their relative size. - 
 
 Venus and theEartha small spherical riflebuHet, Mars^ s^l 
 
 revolver bullet Jupiter an x8.pounder round iTsatrn 
 a 9-pounder round shot, and Uranus and Neptuie lar^e 
 grape shot; th^ latter the largest. The mass'of Jup'^r 
 .s 300 times that of the Earth, while that of Mercury is 
 only about ,Vth, Mars ^Vth. and the Moon ^th. ^ 
 
 The planets are easily recognized by their changing 
 
 he.r places m the sky relatively to the fixed stars-henc! 
 
 their name, which means "wanderer." Thev mav also Hp 
 
 loTt ^' T ^y ^h'"^ °"Jy>y the sunlight reflected 
 fiom then- surfaces, and when viewed through a good 
 telescope, look like small moons, instead of m'ere points 
 of hght, as m the case of the fixed stars, and may be 
 noticed also to pass through phases like the moon 
 especially in the case of the two that are inside the eTrth^ 
 orb. The variability of their brightness is caused pr^y' 
 by this, partly by change in their distances from the earth 
 The well-known rings of Saturn are now supposed to con 
 sistofa shower ofmeteorites revolving round him 
 
 Supposing us to be situated in the northern hemisphere 
 and not too far north, if we watch the apparent motions of 
 he heave^y bodies in the sky we shall Zee tCfToX 
 list ^f n u "''f '"*''' ""^ ^^^^ ^^^J'^^t about th? 
 
 the ax t oTr ' n'"' *'^ ^^^P^^'*^ '^ *^^ -- about 
 the 2ist of June. During the winter half of the year his 
 
 nsing and setting is south of the east and west pdn s of 
 the nonzon, and during the summer half they are north 
 of It; while at two intermediate periods, known as the 
 equinoxes he rises due east, remains in sight for la hours 
 and se 3 due west. At midwinter the afc he descXe^ 
 ZZt ''' '' ''' '°"^^^' ^"^ ^* -^^— er tt 
 
 When the moon is first seen as a young moon she is a 
 I'ttle to the east of the sun. She rapidly'move" th^.h 
 
 i 
 
The Moon. 
 
 the sky towards the east, so that about full moon she 
 rises as the sun sets, and later on is seen as a crescent 
 rising before the sun in the early morning. T4ie^ight ) L.U^ 
 to^whichsh€nses^in4h<iskywillbeobservedtobe (unlilca{'^' -^ 
 the-^ase^f the sun) quite independeixtu^._tlie_tinie oF 
 y«ar. The interval between two new moons— that is the 
 time she takes to make an apparent circuit of the sky-is 
 about 2$ days ; and she rises each day alA '1)1^00 mmyl '" 
 terc of an bow later than the day before. 
 
 The stars, if carefully observed, will be noticed to rise 
 each night a little less than four minutes earlierthan they 
 did the night before, so that at any given hour a certain 
 portion of the sky which was visible at the same hour the 
 night before will have disappeared in the west, and a 
 similar portion will have come into view in the east In 
 fact the whole mass of the stars appears to be slowly over- 
 taking the sun (or rather the sun to be moving through 
 the stars); and, as a consequence, if the stars 
 were visible in the day time this motion could be 
 plain y seen. The points of rising and setting of the stars 
 are always the same. The sun and all the stars reach 
 their greatest height in the sky-or culminate, as it is 
 termed-at a point where they are due north or south of 
 the spectator. 
 
 The stars in the northern portion of the sky. from the 
 horizon up to a certain point depending on the position 
 ot the observer, never rise or set, but describe in the 
 twenty-four hours concentric circles round an imaginary 
 point called the pole, and in a direction contrary to that 
 of the hands of a watch. 
 
 The different planets, {{ carefully observed will be 
 noticed, not only to chan;,^e their positions among the 
 hxed stars, but to vary in brightness from time to time. 
 
 So much for the apparent motions of the heavenly 
 bodies. We have now to consider their real ones. 
 
The Earth'' & Motion. 
 
 she 
 ;ent 
 ight ) iLcU^ 
 
 The earth describes an elliptic orbit round the sun in 
 about 365 j days. It also revolves on its own axis in about 
 a day. This axis remains parallel to itself and is in- 
 clined to the plane of the orbit at an anj^le of about 23" 
 27'. Hence the phenomena of the seasons, and of the 
 varying positions of the sun from day to day. 
 
 Fifr. I. 
 
 Figure i shows the position of the earth with reference 
 to the sun at the different seasons. N is the north pole, 
 S the south pole, and A a point in the northern hemis- 
 phere. The left hand sphere shows the earth's position 
 when it is midwinter at A, and the right hand sphere 
 when it is midsummer. 
 
 The motion of the earth round the sun causes the latter 
 to continually change its apparent position amongst the 
 stars. Its path through them is called the ecliptic, and 
 lies, of course, in the plane of the earth's orbit. The 
 earth's revolution round its own axis, although on an 
 average 24 hours if taken with reference to the sun, really 
 takes place in space in about 3 minutes and 56 seconds 
 less than 24 hours, the difference being, in fact, the same 
 as that between two successive risings or settings of the 
 same star. It should also be noted that, owing to the 
 enormous distances of the fixed stars from us, all lines 
 drawn from the earth, no matter what *ts position, to 
 any star, are sensibly parallel. 
 
Mean time. 
 
 th po", A ="^"=7!,<'''^^ "'- i' - apparent „oo„ a 
 ine pomt A. O, a .d O, are the earth's centre, and S 
 
 a'o S 'C"' '°l!'r^ "' * ""=■■" =•- - --"fronl 
 
 th'e°arfl^.H^5''T '''°°^^'- ^<'' ^^ 0» '"'-=<^ct 
 me eartJi s circumference at B. It is PviH^nf ♦» * i. 
 
 the earth's revolution on-itsixis^rSh^'ft^il?^ 
 pos.l,on B in E, that it will have descr bed a coranlet 
 revo:nt,on with reference to space and that the Tr w , 
 agara be on the meridian-in other words tha a sTder"! 
 day w,ll have elapsed since it left the position Elnd 
 that to bnng the san on to the meridian at A ink h 
 w. I have to describe an additional arc B A This ate 
 ^he same as the angle B O, A, which is e,nal to te a"g le 
 
 s°defea?dav" Kth"' """'f ^ ''^*"^^" » -'- and'a 
 aereal da) . If there are n days in the year the value of 
 
 th,s arc will be l^. Reduced to time it is about 3m. 56s. 
 
 ^.y^"'^'^ "''^''^ ^''' ^"^"^^'^ '" l«i^P S"ch a rate that 
 24 0flhe,rho„rs give the average interval between tv^o 
 successive culminations of the sun. The real inTerval I 
 however, sometimes more, sometimes less than ^'n"' 
 consequently, the sun does not culminate or pass tife 
 mer^tan at noon, but sometimes before it, somet n et 
 
 Thai ^t'a^fbrf '"■''"?"''''"'' "'>""• "-'■! ""•""- 
 mstant the sun ,s on the meridian is called ".ipparent 
 
 1 
 
 r 
 
The equation of time. 
 
 ^ 
 
 r 
 
 noon. Noon as shown by a perfect clock is called 
 mean noon." The interval between the two is called the 
 "equation of time." Its greatest amount is about the ist 
 of November, when the sun culminates about iih. 4jm. 
 41S. A.M. The equation then diminishes till about the 24th 
 December, when mean and apparent noon coincide. After 
 that the equation increases (the sun culminating after 
 noon) till It attains a maximum of 14I. minutes about the 
 nth February, and then continues to decrease, becoming 
 ;^t.ro again about the 14th of April. It attains a maximum 
 "t 3m. 50S. about 14th May, becomes zero about 14th 
 June, 6i mmutes about 25th July and 2ero 31st August. 
 The cause of the equation of time is as follows. If the 
 earth moved round the sun in a circle and at a unifprm 
 rate, and if the axis on which it itself turns were perpen- 
 dicular to the plane of its orbit, the sun would culminate 
 each dr.y at noon exactly. But the earth moves in an 
 ellipse and at a variable rate, and its axis is inclined to 
 the plane of the ecliptic at a considerable angle, the com- 
 bined effect being that we have the equation of time. 
 
 The great circle on the earth whose plane passes 
 through the centre and is at right angles to the axis is 
 called the "equator," and the projection of its plane in the 
 heavens is also called the equator, and sometimes the 
 equinoctial. If the sun, in its apparent annual path 
 moved at a uniform rate and traversed the equinoctial in- 
 stead of the ecliptic we should have no equation of time 
 An imaginary sun moving in this way is called the "mean 
 sun." 
 
 In addition to the time kept by an ordinary clock and 
 that kept by the sun— in other words "mean time" and 
 apparent solar time"-we have a third kind called 
 sidereal time," that is, the time kept by the stars. It 
 has been already mentioned that the interval between two 
 successive culminations of the same star is a little less 
 than 24 hours ; the time it takes, in fact, for the earth 
 
lo 
 
 Sidereal time. 
 
 to make a single revolution on its axis. If we divide this 
 interval into 24 equal parts we have 24 sidereal hours; and 
 if vve construct a clock with its hours numbered up to 24 
 instead of 12, and rate it to keep time with the stars, it is 
 easy to see that the hour it shows at any instant will give 
 the exact position of the stars in their apparent diurnal 
 revolution round the earth, ('locks and chronometers of 
 thisdescription are used — the former in fixed observatories, 
 the latter for surveying purposes. 
 
 The subject of sidereal time will be referred to later on. 
 Before proceeding further it will be necessary to explain 
 the meaning of the various astronomical terms in ordinary 
 use. 
 
de this 
 rs; and 
 I to 24 
 rs, it is 
 'ill give 
 diurnal 
 iters of 
 itories, 
 
 ter on. 
 explain 
 ■dinary 
 
 
 I. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 EXPLANATION Ol' CERTAIN ASTRONOMICAL TERMS. 
 NAUTICAL ALMANAC. 
 
 THE 
 
 For practical purposes the earth may be considered as a 
 stationary globe situated at the centre of a vast transparent 
 sphere at an infinite distance to which are attached the 
 fixed stars, and which revolves round it in a little less than 
 24 hours. The sun, moon, and planets appear to move on 
 the surface of this great sphere, the sun in the ecliptic, 
 the rest in their respective orbits. 
 
 The extremities of the earth's axis are called the poles ; 
 and the poles of the great sphere are the points where the 
 axis produced meets it. 
 
 Great circles passing through the poles are called 
 "meridians." This term applies both to the earth and 
 the great sphere. In the case of the latter they are also 
 called "declination circles." Meridians are also called 
 "hour circles," and the angle contained between the 
 planes of any two meridians is called an "hour angle," be- 
 cause it is a measure of the time the sphere takes to 
 revolve through that angle. It follows that the hour 
 angle is the angle formed by two meridians at the poles. 
 
 In speaking of the meridian of a place we mean the 
 great circle pa ung through the place and the poles; and 
 a great circle passing through the poles of the great 
 sphere and the zenith (or point in the sky immediately 
 
12 
 
 Latitude and longitude. 
 
 ridian for the instant, 
 
 ki^§t the observers head) is the 
 as regai ds the great sphere. 
 
 To fix the relative position of points on the earth's sur- 
 face we employ certain co-ordinates, called "latitude" and 
 "longitude." The former is the angular distance of any 
 point from the equator, and is measured along a meridian 
 north or south as the case may be. The latitude thus 
 varies from zero at the equator to 90° at the poles. 
 
 Longitude is the angular distance of the meridian of the 
 place from a certain fixed initial meridian, and is measured 
 either by the intercepted arc of the equator or by the 
 angle contained by the two meridians. Longitude is 
 measured east for 180° and west for 180°. Different 
 countries reckon from different initial meridians. The 
 English use that of Greenwich. The present system has 
 many inconveniences, and it is to W. hoped that someday 
 the world will unite in adopting some fixed meridian and 
 will reckon longitude through the whole j6o degrees in- 
 stead of as at present. 
 
 The position of the heavenly bodies on the great sphere 
 is determined by similar co-ordinates, but the latter are 
 called "declination" and "right ascension," the former 
 corresponding to latitude and the latter to longitude. 
 Declination is measured from the equinoctial towards 
 the poles, and right ascension eastward from a certain 
 meridian. The latter is, however, reckoned through llir 
 whole 36o",and is counted byhour^, minutes, and sec ids 
 instead of by degrees, i hour corresponding to isdegiees. 
 
 The point where the ;{ero or 24-hour meridian cuts the 
 equator is called the "first point of Aries," and is desig- 
 nated -V the symbol /". It is also one of the intersections 
 of theeq. ^'o'- -ith theecliptic. On referringtothe Nautical 
 Almarn. ^ viii hf ; een that the co-ordinates of the stars 
 are co.uim;>' lly changing. The fact is that, owing to the 
 slow cci.ical .; orion of the earth's axis known as the "pre- 
 
 % 
 
Altitude and azimuth. 
 
 n 
 
 cession of the equinoxes," the planes of reference are 
 changing,'. This, however, causes no practical iticonveni- 
 ence. as the relative positions of the stars remain the same. 
 
 It should be noticed here that the terms "latitude" and 
 "longitude" are also used with reference to the heavenly 
 budies, and are liable to cause confusion. These co- 
 ordmates are measured from and along the ecliptic, and 
 are not required for the problems here treated of. 
 
 Hesides the above-mentioned co-ordinates which relate 
 to the relative position of points on a sphere another set 
 IS necessary to fix the position of a heavenly body with 
 reference to the observer at any instant. They are called 
 "altitude" and "a;jimuth." The first scarcely needs ex- 
 planation. The second is the angle formed by the verti- 
 ca' plane passing through the observer and the object 
 with the plane of the observer's meridian. The altitude 
 and azimuth of a star at any instant are, in fact, the angles 
 read by the vertical and horizontal arcs of a theodolite 
 respectively when the latter has been clamped with its 
 Aovo due north, and the telescope has been directed on the 
 star. Azimuth is generally reckoned from the north 
 round by the east, south, and west; but it is sometimes 
 reckoned from the south. 
 
 The plane of the "sensible horizon" is the horizontal 
 plane passing through the observer's position, and there- 
 lore tangential to the earth's surface at that point. The 
 "rational horizon" is a plane parallel to that of the sen- 
 sible horizon and passing through the centre of the earth 
 The projections of these two planes on the great sphere 
 coincide, being at an infinite distance. 
 
 It is easy to see that about half the great sphere is in 
 sight at any instant. The portion that is visible depends 
 generally on the latitude of the place and the sidereal 
 time of the instant. At the north pole the whole north- 
 ern hemisphere would be always in sight and no other 
 
 % 
 
14 
 
 Definitions. 
 
 part At the south pole the view would be limited to the 
 southern hemisphere. At the equator both poles would 
 be on the hor,.on, and every point on the j^reat sphere 
 would come m sight in succession. At intermediate 
 places a certam portion round one pole would always be 
 above the hon.on, while another portion round the other 
 pole would never be visible. 
 
 "Parallels of latitude" are small circles made by the in- 
 tersection with the earth's surface of planes parallel to the 
 equator. Similar circles on the great sphere are called 
 declination parallels." A little consideration will show 
 that w.thin a certain distance of the equator at each side 
 
 at mid / '" t^k' /"''' '" '^' y'^'' P^'' °v-head 
 at mid-day. The belt enclosed between the two parallels 
 within which this takes place is known as the "tropics." 
 
 sutlZT.^ ''<,I'"'''^ '''""' '"^"'^^ explanation. When 
 speaking of the "hour angle" of a heavenly body at any 
 instant we mean the angle formed at the pole by the 
 meridian circle of the instant and the declination circle 
 passing through the body. 
 
 By the term "circumpolar star" is meant a star which 
 never sets but appears to describe a complete circle round 
 -he pole. These stars cross the merdian twice in the 
 twenty- our hours. One crossing is called the "upper 
 
 wTn 'th : '''"" ''' ''°"^'" *^^"^'^ •" A* ^he points be- 
 tween the transits at which the stars have the greatest 
 azimuth from the meridian they are said to be at the 
 
 greatest elongation," either east or west. 
 The words "transit" and "culminate" have the same 
 meaning when used with reference to stars which rise and 
 
 tio7Tv ''; '' '^' ''''"^' ^" '^' "PP^^^"* '•^'-tive posi- 
 lon of objects owing to a change in the observer's posi- 
 lon^ Astronomically it generally signifies the difference 
 
 in the apparent position of a heavenly body as seen by an 
 
 
 
} 
 
 Parallax. 
 
 J5 
 
 observer from what it would be if viewed from the centre 
 of the earth. Parallax is greatest when the object is on 
 the horizon, and nothing when it is in the zenith. The 
 moon, from being near the earth, has a considerable 
 parallax. That of the sun does not exceed 9". The 
 positions of the sun, moon, and planets given in the Nauti- 
 cal Almanac are those which they would have as seen 
 from the earth's centre, and it is therefore necessary to 
 correct all observations on those bodies for parallax. 
 
 Parallax causes the object to have less than its true 
 altitude. Refraction has the opposite effect. The latter, 
 like the former, diminishes with the altitude. Near the 
 horizon— say within 10 degrees of it— its effect is very un- 
 certain, and observations of objects in that position are 
 therefore unreliable. At an altitude of 45° the refraction 
 is about i'. As it varies with the temperature and atmos- 
 pheric pressure the barometer and the thermometer must 
 be read if very exact results are required. '"^ 
 
 The corrections for refraction and parallax are not to be 
 found in the Nautical Almanac, but are given in all sets of 
 mathematical tables. The N. A., as a rule, gives only 
 variable quantities — such as declination, right ascen- 
 sion, equation of time, etc. It is rather a bulky volume, but 
 the portions of it in general use by the practical surveyor 
 could be comprised in a small pamphlet. The most use- 
 ful are the sun's declination and right ascension, the equa- 
 tion of time, the sun's semi-diameter, and the sidereal 
 time of mean noon — all given for every day in the year ; 
 the declinations and right ascensions of the principal 
 fixed stars, taken in regular order according to their right 
 ascensions ; and the tables for converting intervals of mean 
 time into sidereal time and 7ricc versa. To these may be 
 added tables of moon-culminating stars, and tables for 
 finding the latitude from the altitude of the pole star when 
 off the meridian. 
 
 I 'i 
 
i6 
 
 The Nautical Almanac. 
 
 riven r\ ^u""" ^"' P^"?" °f ">» ')'■='"'«« 
 g van for each month ,„ the Nautical Almanac, and of the 
 da a for fi.ed stars, are reprinted below. All he quanti- 
 t on tT" °' "T "' ''■■"""'^h on the day in' ques- 
 .on They must, therefore, be corrected by a propor- 
 t.on for any other hour o, longitude. Thus.'^when ^ s 
 noon at a place in 90' west longitude, or si.v h^urs we,, of 
 Greenwrch, ,. ,s 6 p.m. at the latter. ThereforeTt an 
 observafon were taken at the western station at noon the 
 quan.,t,es requ.red would have ,0 be corrected for "heir 
 change m six hours. 
 
 Owing to the earth's uniform revolution round its axis 
 
 Zfh7 a' , ""'^^ ''"^" "* Greenwich was 3 p.m 
 and the sidereal time iih., they would be g a m and ^h' 
 respectively at a place in longitude 90" west ^ 
 
 In the Nautical Almanac the day is supposed to com 
 mence at noon and to last for 34 hours. Thus ga mTn' 
 
 1st ot January. This astronomical method of reckoning 
 mean time must not be confounded with sidereal t^. 
 which is quite a different thing. *™'' 
 
 fhl^^Tl""" *^' ^''' °^ ""^^ "^°"th are given also at 
 the end of the preceding month. Thus, weLd sTlyl 
 
 ZZVfFr'''''''Z'''''^'' ^^ ''^ 3ad being real^ 
 at ng '' "^'^ " '°^ convenience in interpo- 
 
Nautical A Imanac. 
 
 17 
 
 JUNE, 1880. 
 
 AT APPARENT NOON. 
 
 THE SUNS 
 
 Apparent 
 Right 
 
 Var. 
 
 Apparent 
 
 AscensionUour Declination. hoVr.MeSL, 
 
 Sidereal Eflaation 
 time of of Time 
 
 the to be 
 
 Semi- i *"*<./rom 
 
 , diameter j «rf,/,,rf to Var 
 Var. passmg U/„..„ J i^"^,- 
 in I I, the II Time, jhour. 
 
 :h m s s 
 
 I i4 39 071 110241 
 10-258 j 
 
 2j'4 43 671 
 3 4 47 1310 
 
 I0'274 '[ 22 
 
 |4 51 i9'87 10-289 
 |4 55 26-gg 10-304 
 i4 59 34 44 10-317 
 
 N.22 8 59-6 19-79 
 22 16 42-9I18-82 
 ' 24 2-9|i7-85 
 
 3 4220 
 5 7 5024 
 5 II 58-54 
 
 10-329 
 
 10-340 ; 
 
 10351 
 
 5 16 708 10-360 
 5 20 15-82 10-368 
 '5 24 2474 10-375 
 
 1315 28 33-8r 10-381 
 '4115 32 4302 10-386 j 
 i5||5 36 52-34110-3801 
 
 22 30 59-4116-86 
 22 Z7 32-3I15-87 
 22 43 41-3 14-88 
 
 22 49 26-5|i3-88l I 8-72 
 22 54 47-612-88 ;i 8-7S 
 22 59 44-6.-II-87 ,1 8-79 
 
 23 4 17-3 10-86 
 23 8 25-7, 9-84 
 23 12 9-6I 8-82 
 
 23 15 290) 7-79 
 23 18 23-71 6-77 
 23 20 53-8,1 5-74 
 
 m s j s 
 2 21-83 0.384 
 2 12-42 0-400 
 2 2 61 0416 
 
 I 52-43 0-431 
 I 41-90 1.1-446 
 I 31-03 0459 
 
 1 19-86 0-471 
 ' 8-41 0-483 
 o 56-7o;o.493 
 
 44 '75 (0-502 
 3260 0510 
 20-27 0-517 
 
 0523 
 
 ° 4-8310-528 
 ° 17-35 |o-532 
 
i8 
 
 Nautical A Imanac. 
 
 JUNE, 1880. 
 
 AT MEAN NOON. 
 
 I 
 
 43 
 
 o 
 
 Apparent 
 Right 
 Sr-'fAscension 
 
 Oil 
 
 Tues. 
 Wed. 
 Thur. 
 
 Frid. 
 
 Sat. 
 
 Sun. 
 
 h m s 
 4 39 III 
 
 4 43 7-09 
 
 i4 47 13-45 
 
 I 
 
 14 51 20- 19 
 
 14 55 27-28 
 
 (4 59 3470 
 
 THE SUN'S 
 
 Equation of 
 
 Time, 
 
 to be 
 
 added to 
 
 subt. from 
 
 Mean 
 
 Time. 
 
 
 Apparent 
 Declination. 
 
 Semi- 
 diameter. 
 
 Sidereal 
 rime. 
 
 / // 
 
 N.22 9 0-4 
 22 16 43-6 
 22 24 3-5 
 
 22 30 59-9 
 22 37 32-7' 
 22 43 41-7 
 
 15 48-1 : 
 
 15 47-9 ; 
 
 15 47-8 
 15 47-7 ^j 
 
 15 475 :; 
 15 474 .i 
 
 m s ! 
 2 21-82 
 2 12-40 j 
 2 2-59 ! 
 
 I 52-41 
 I 41-88 
 I 31-02 
 
 h m s 
 4 41 2293 
 4 45 19-49 
 4 49 iG-05 
 
 4 53 12-60 
 
 4 57 9-16 
 
 5 I 572 
 
 Mon. 
 Tues. 
 Wed. 
 
 7 , 
 
 8 j 
 
 9 ' 
 
 5 3 42-43 
 5 7 50-44 
 5 II 58-71 
 
 Thur. 
 
 Frid. 
 
 Sat. 
 
 10 
 II 
 
 12 
 
 5 16 721 
 5 20 15-91 
 5 24 24-80 
 
 Sun. 
 Mon. 
 Tues. 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 15 '■ 
 
 5 28 33-84 
 5 32 43-01 
 5 36 52-29 
 
 22 49 26-8, 15 47-3 ;; 
 22 54 47-91 15 47-2 Ij 
 
 22 59 44-8' 15 47-1 
 
 I 19-85 
 I 8-40 
 
 o 56-69 
 
 ~3 4 17-5 
 23 8 25-8 
 23 12 9-7 
 
 15 470 
 15 46-9 
 15 468 
 
 23 15 290 
 23 18 23-7 
 23 20 53-9 
 
 15 467 
 15 467 
 IS 46-6 
 
 o 
 o 
 o 
 
 44-75 
 3260 
 
 2027 
 
 4-83 
 17-55 
 
 5 5 2-28 
 5 8 58-83 
 5 12 55-39 
 
 5 16 51-95 
 5 20 48-51 
 5 24 45-07 
 
 5 28 41-62 
 5 32 38-18 
 5 36 34 74 
 
 APPARENT PLACES OF STARS. 1880. 
 
 AT UPPER TRANSIT .\T GREENWICH. 
 
 Month 
 and 
 
 « Andromedje 
 
 Day. 
 
 R.A. 
 
 Dec.N. 
 
 Jan. I 
 II 
 21 
 31 
 
 h m 
 
 2 
 
 s 
 
 11-88 
 11-75 J3 
 11-62 '-' 
 11-51 ", 
 
 ,j 
 
 28251 
 
 1 
 
 55^ 9i 
 54-4 
 
 51-8 'H 
 
 y Pegasi. 
 (AlgenibJ 
 
 h 
 
 O 
 
 s 
 4-24 
 
 4-13 
 402 
 
 393 
 
 8-6 
 
 77 
 6-8 
 
 5-7 
 
 '9-^' 11^5 fJ;26-3o ^^162-7 
 
 19-50 
 
 19-39 
 19-30 
 
 ii-«''' 3i 
 ^81-6 -I 
 
 93 6^5 '" 
 ^4-51 ^^i59-8 II 
 
 25-37 
 124-51 
 '2373 
 
12 
 
 The Celestial Globe. 
 
 •• 
 
 19 
 
 To revert to the subject of sidereal time: Sincrthe 
 sidereal clock stands at ^ero or 24!!. at the instant the ist 
 point of Aries is on themeridian, and as the clock keeps 
 time with the stars in ^apparent diurnal revolution round 
 the earth, it follows tlmt when any particular star is on the 
 meridian its right ascension is the sidereal time of the in- 
 stant. Thus, if the stars R. A. were 6h. the clock should 
 show thattime at the instant of the stars transit, and its 
 error may be ascertained by mountim^ a telescope .0 as to 
 move only in the plane of the meridian, and noting the 
 instant of transit. If we want to find the mean time of a 
 stars transit we have only to convert the star's R A 
 into the corresponding mean time of the instant, in 'the 
 manner to be presently explained. Conversely, a star's 
 transit gives us the sidereal time of the instant, and hence 
 the true mean time. 
 
 The celestial globe is of great use in studying astronomy. 
 It IS a model of the great sphere supposed to be viewed 
 from outside. The positions of the stars on it are the 
 points where straight lines, joining them with the earth 
 would intersect it. The equator and ecliptic-the lattei' 
 being the sun s annual path through the stars-are marked 
 on It, as also the sun's place in the ecliptic for every five 
 Jays. The axis on which it turns is that of the poles 
 1 he meval ring passing through the latter represents the 
 meridian and the flat horizontal ring the plane of he 
 rational horizon. ^ y ^i me 
 
 t.-o?"'fl'^' '^''^"''' °^'^" ^^^°^^ '^ t° «how the posi- 
 
 tZ. T T'\^' ^"^' '"''""' ^^'^^^ ^•^S^'-d to the spec- 
 tatoi. To do this we raise the pole by means of the 
 
 ToTrr- '''' ""7'^^" ^^ ^^ *« ^'- ^* - altitude 
 br2 tt °"i ''"'^ '" '^'' ^"^^^"^^ °f *he place, and 
 
 bung the sun's place in the ecliptic for the day to the 
 
 meridian The half of the globe above the horizon wl 
 now roughly represent the position of the visible hemis- 
 phere at noon. To find the position of the sphere at any 
 
20 
 
 The Great Sphere. 
 
 other hour it is only necessary to turn the Tlobe through 
 
 ITL stirs at I r ""''!'" f "' °"* ^'^^ ^'^'^^^ P-'tions 
 ot tne stars at 8 p. m. we should have to revolve the dobe 
 
 westwards through an angle of x.o^ Conversely we can 
 find the name of any constellation or star by noting 
 
 IccSgTy.'" ''' ''' -^ '- '-- -^ s.U..X:Zl 
 
 easTtr'*.'^''^' P'f '"^ *^^°"^^ the zenith and the 
 angles to the mend.an, ,s called the "prime vertical " 
 
 Pig' 3. 
 
 In Figure 3 the small circle at the centre represents the 
 
 ^nelk- '1 ')' ''''' ^'"'^ *^^ ^^-t ^Ph-- Strictly 
 
 to the Tal r: ''""'' '^ ^ "^^^ P«'"t ^" comparison 
 
 to the latter, and the pomts on the great sphere would ap- 
 
 f 
 
ough 
 
 from 
 
 tions 
 
 flobe 
 
 2 can 
 
 3ting 
 
 jlobe 
 
 the 
 
 ■ight 
 
 Explanation of Terms. 
 
 f 
 
 21 
 
 iionzon, and p pi the earth's polar axis meeting fh^ 
 
 grea. sphere i„ .he points P l. z if/he .e"' N 
 
 he nad,r or po,n. on .he sphere diame.ricaliy opposi.e 
 
 "^ The plane of the paper represen.s .he plane of tl e 
 
 po.n.s of he horizon, . j ,s .he equa.or, E r O the 
 eq „,oc,.a r the firs. poin. of Aries, and P ,' P . .L 
 .n .,al dechnat.on circle passing through i., fro™ wh ch 
 
 '- Dorfiln f "" °" '"' "'"''"''''' ■""'dian. Z S B 
 
 Ind ri r ?•'"■'? '"■'=''=• P''^^'"'! "'""gh the .enith 
 and S and mee.mg the horizon a. B. Z B is of coursi 
 
 .'re',. s„h Tf '■'P'''''"' "'^ ^PP""^"' '""'ion of the 
 grea. sphere wi.h respec. to .he earth, 
 
 Do.^n','?"'' ^'f'r?' ""' ""«'■= '' ° '• '^ "-^ '^"'"de of .he 
 po n. A, and A O j=Z O Q, which is .he zeni.h distant 
 
 Mepij, /t;?et^.°1'^ 
 
 It should be noticed .ha. .he whole of .he hemisphei 
 above the plane H B R is visible .0 the observer a A 
 (nor m'I ",^«"™" "f '•>' ^'ar S is zero, its declina;ion 
 (north) S hour angle S P Z, its al.itude S B, zeni.h 
 d,s.a„ce S / and azin^uth S Z R. The star S- hLs R. A 
 r «, decimation (south) Q s! hour angle nil, altitude 
 S' R, zen.th distance, S. Z, and azimuth ze o. The 
 
 dereal „me of .he instant is r P Q, or the arc r Q a 
 
 triangle P Z S ,s called the "astronomical trianrie " It 
 should be noted that in all calculations it north declina 
 
 ..on ,s reckonedpositive,southdecli„atio„must becounted 
 negative, and wee z;m«. "uuiea 
 
CHAPTER III. 
 
 Uses of practical astronomy to the surveyor. 
 
 Instruments employed in the field. Methods 
 
 of using them. Taking altitudes. Problems 
 
 RELATING to time. 
 
 The principal uses of practical astronomv to the sur- 
 veyor are that it enables him to ascertain his latitude, 
 longitude, local mean time, and the azimuth of any 
 
 given hne; the latter of course ^'iving him the true north and 
 south line and the variation of the compass. In fact the 
 only check he has on his work as regards direction when 
 running a long straight line across country is by determin- 
 ing its true azimuth from time to time, allowing (as will 
 be explained hereafter) for the convergence of meridians. 
 The mstruments usually employed are the transit theo- 
 dolite, sextant or reflecting circle with artificial horizon, 
 solar compass, portable transit telescope, and zenith tele- 
 scope. To these must be added a watch or chronometer 
 keeping mean time, a sidereal time chronometer (this is 
 not, however, absolutely essential), the Nautical Almanac 
 for the year, and a set of mathematical tables. With the 
 sextant or" reflecting circle we can measure altitudes and 
 work out all problems depending on them alone, and also 
 lunar distances. The transit theodolite may be used for 
 altitudes, and also gives azimuths. The solar compass 
 IS a contrivance for finding, mechanically, the latitude. 
 
 1 
 
Instrumenta. 
 
 i 
 
 J 
 
 ^ 
 
 meridian line, and sun's hour anj^le. The zenith tele^ 
 scope gives the latitude with great exactness, and is par- 
 ticularly suited to the work of laying down a parallel of 
 at.tude The transit telescope enables us to determine 
 the mean and sidereal time, latitude, and longitude. The 
 transit theodolite answers the same purpose, but is not 
 so delicate an instrument. It is, however, of almost uni- 
 versal application, and nearly every problem of practical 
 field astronomy may be worked out by its means alone if 
 the observer has a fairly good ordinary watch. The sex 
 tant has been called a portable observatory; but in the 
 writer's opinion the term is more applicable to the last 
 named instrument. The sextant is not so easy to manage 
 and only measures angles up to about Ii6,° so that s8" is 
 practically the greatest attitude that can be taken wJth it 
 when the artificial horizm has to be used. The latter 
 as generally made, is disturbed by the least wind, and 
 then gives a blurred reflection. maHng the observation 
 nearly worthless. There is little use in having the arc 
 graduated to read to within a few seconds if the contact 
 of the images cannot be made with certainty to within a 
 minute or two. 
 
 All observations taken with the transit theodolite should 
 If the nature of the case admits of it, be repeated in re- 
 versed positions of the telescope and horizontal plate and 
 he naean of the readings taken, as we thereby get rid of 
 
 r'of Thi '1"'"''^''^"i '"'^•^' '^"^^ "*''- '"^--"tll 
 errors hus, for an altitude, the plate having been 
 
 evened, the vertical arc set at .ero, and the bubble of Ihe 
 
 telescope level brought to the middle by the twin screws 
 
 the verticahty of the axis is tested by turning the upp 
 
 plate in azimuth i8o°, and seeing if the bubble is still in 
 
 the centre. If it is not it is corrected, half by the lower 
 
 plate sere., half by the twin screws, and the operation 
 
 repeated til the bubble remains in the centre in ever" 
 
 position. Ihe altitude is then taken, the telescope 
 
H 
 
 A Ititudes. 
 
 turned over, the upper plate turned round, and the alti- 
 tude again read. In each case both verniers should be 
 read. 
 
 The first step after taking an alticude with either 
 sextant or theodolite is to correct it for index error, if 
 there is any. The following lists give the corrections to 
 be applied in each case to an altitude of the sun's upper 
 or lower limb to obtain that of his centre : 
 
 THEODOLITE. 
 
 Index error. 
 
 Refraction. 
 
 Parallax. 
 
 Semi-diameter. 
 
 SEXTANT. 
 
 Altitude above 
 water horizon. 
 
 Index Error. 
 Dip of Horizon. 
 Refraction. 
 Parallax. 
 Semi-diameter. 
 
 Double Altitude with 
 artificial horizon. 
 
 Index Error. 
 Divison by 2. 
 Refraction. 
 Parallax. 
 Semi-diameter. 
 
 The semi-diameter has to be added if the lev er limb 
 IS observed, and vice versa. When taking an altitude for 
 time with the artificial horizon the easiest way to get the 
 correct instant of contact is to bring the two images into 
 such a position that they overlap a little while recedinjr 
 from each other. Ai^the instant they just touch the 
 observer calls "stop," the assistant notes the exact watch 
 time, and the vernier is then read. This plan necessitates 
 observing the lower limb in the forenoon and the upper 
 in the afternoon. The dip depends on the height of the 
 instrument above the water, and, like the refraction and 
 parallax, is to be found in the mathematical tables. 
 
 In the case of a meridian altitude for latitude the sun 
 or star, after rising to its greatest height, appears for a 
 short time to move horizontally. When this is the case 
 the altitude may be read off. 
 
 Fixed stars require, of course, no correction for parallax 
 or semi-diameter. As the refraction tables require a 
 correction for temperature and atmospheric pressure the 
 height of the thermometer and barometer should be noted 
 
 t 
 
 . 
 
Equation of Time. 
 
 r 
 
 25 
 
 If an altitude has to be taken with the sextant and 
 H.t.fic.al horizon, and the sun is too high in the heavens 
 for^t^he ,nstrun.ent, a su.table star n^ust be observed Tn! 
 
 In surveying operations the latitude is generally known 
 aF^roxjn.ately. This gives the approximate altitVdeTo" 
 a rner,d.an observation; for the altitude of the intersec- 
 K>n of the mend.an and equator being 90' minus the 
 lautude. we have only to add to or subtract from thi 
 tTtud"^ '^'''' declination, and we have t^e al- 
 
 \ T f . , , . y . f i ^ AVSE OF THE EQUATION OF TIME. 
 
 In Figure 4 P is the pole, E C 
 
 a portion of the ecliptic, and E Q 
 
 a portion of the equr.tor; each 
 
 being equal to go°. C and Q are 
 
 on the same meridian, and P Q is 
 
 also a quadrant. Now, let S be the 
 
 sun, and suppose it to move at a 
 
 uniform rate from E to C. Let ^■ 
 
 S' be an imaginary sun (called the "mean" sun') moving 
 m the equator at the same rate as the real sun. Now let 
 the two suns start together from E, and after a cer ain 
 interval let their position be as shown in the figure 
 Since they move at the same rate. E S will be equal to 
 t ir> , but as a consequence the meridians P S and PS' 
 S p c?;°'"''^f ' ^; ^^"^"^ ^°t ^h^-d of S. The angle 
 time aZ.' '^" '"° "^'"^'""^ ^^ *h« equation of 
 IZn f ' •. ° '""' """"'^ ^"'^^ simultaneously at C 
 and Q It IS evident that, though S^ gains on S at first, it 
 will, after a certain point, cease to gain and lose insteld 
 Since the equation of time-in other words the differ- 
 ence between apparent and mean solar time-is con- 
 
 the'mtn ."'"^' '' "' """* *° '"^ ^^°- ^^e Almanac 
 the mean time corresponding to apparent time at any 
 
 
 '/^ 
 
 rn:^ c ^'-K^t^ £^c<.f„^-c_^ 
 
 '1- 
 
 
 <X (. ^i 
 
 '^ ' * Cj.a^ 
 
 ./ 
 
*^ Connexion of Sidereal 
 
 particular instant and longitude, we must allow for the 
 change in the equation that has taken place since noon 
 at Greenwich. For instance ; suppose we had to find the 
 mean time corresponding to three hours p.m. apparent 
 time on the 22nd April, 1882 at a place in longitude 6h. 
 west. By the N. A. the equation of time at apparent noon 
 that day at Greenwich was im. 34s. 43, to be subtracted 
 Irom apparent time and increasing, the variation per hour 
 o.s.496. At 3 P.M. at the place it would be 9 p.m at 
 Greenwich. 9x05.496=45.464. The corrected equation 
 of time is im. 383.89, and the true mean time 2h. s8m 
 ais.ii p.m. 
 
 GIVEN THE SIDEREAL TIME AT A CERTAIN INSTANT TO 
 FIND THE MEAN TIME. 
 
 Here we have given the right ascension of the declina- 
 tion circle of the great sphei-e that is on the meridian at 
 the instant, or— which is the same thing— the time that a 
 sidereal clock would show. Now the Nautical Almanac 
 gives the sidereal time of mean noon at Greenwich which 
 has to be corrected for longitude. These two data give 
 us the interval in sidereal time that has elapsed since 
 mean noon, and this, converted into mean time units 
 will be the mean time. ' 
 
 Ex. Find the mean time corresponding to 14 hours 
 sidereal time at Kingston on the 28th April, 1882. 
 We find from the N. A. 
 
 Sidereal time of mean noon at Greenwich ,h ,,.„ 
 
 Correction for longitude reenwicn 2h, 25m. 258-33 
 
 50-26 
 
 Sidereal time of mean noon at Kineston Tii e 
 
 Sidereal time of the instant. *^'"^''°" /h. 26m. 155-59 
 
 14". om. OS 
 
 Difference, or interval of sidereal time that has elapsed ' 
 smce mean noon ^ , 
 
 Which, converted into mean iime:\s::::::::::::::i^: ^^;^: ^^^^^^ 
 
 The conversion of sidereal into mean time units and 
 vtce versa, is obtained from tables at the end of the Nauti- 
 cal Almanac. 
 
 f 
 
and Mean Time. ,- 
 
 If the sidereal time of mean noon is greater than the 
 sidereal time given we shall obtain the interval before 
 mean noon. Thus, if on the same date as above we 
 wanted to find the mean time corresponding to sidereal 
 time one hour we should proceed as follows : 
 Sidereal time of mean noon ,k < 
 
 " oftheinstant .'i 2h. 26m. .jseg 
 
 I o o 
 
 Sidereal interval before mean noon ] ^ ~r 
 
 Which in mean time units is ~ 7 7 
 
 Subtracting this from i2h ^° '' 5^ 
 
 la o o 
 
 We have mean time .o h. 33m. 58s 44 . m. 
 
 It is sometimes convenient to add 24 hours to the given 
 sidereal time to make the subtraction possible. Thus if 
 the sidereal time were ih.. and the sidereal time of mean 
 noon 23h.. we should have the interval elapsed since mean 
 
 Tan tL^^' " ' '°""' '-''-' ^' ''' 59-. 40S.3 P.M., 
 
 TO FIND THE MEAN TIME AT WHICH A GIVEN STAR WILL 
 BE ON THE MERIDIAN. 
 
 fJ*;!! ^A^^^^" application of the preceding problem. 
 For the Almanac gives us the star's right ascension, which 
 IS the same thing as the sidereal time of its culmination, 
 and we have merely to find the mean time corresponding 
 
 GIVEN THE LOCAL MEAN TIME AT ANY INSTANT TO FIND 
 THE SIDEREAL TIME. 
 
 Here we must convert the interval in mean time that 
 has elapsed smce the preceding noon into sidereal units 
 and add to ,t the sidereal time of mean noon 
 
 Aoril' ^Z^ *he sidereal time at 9 a.m.. on the 29th of 
 April, 1882, at Kingston, Canada. 
 Here we have, as before: 
 
 Add 21 hours of mean time in sidereal units, or.' „ J^' 'f ^ 
 
 " 3 20' Q8 
 
 Sidereal time "~~ 
 
 ajn. 29m. 425-67 
 
r 
 
 28 
 
 Sidereal Time. 
 
 If this process makes the result more than 24 hours 
 that number must, of course, be subtracted from it. Thus, 
 if we got 25 hours the sidereal clock would show ih. If 
 the sidereal time of mean noon is greater than the inter- 
 val in sidereal units we add 24 hours to the latter to make 
 the subtraction possible. 
 
 The correction on account of longitude for the sidereal 
 time of mean noon is constant for any particular place or 
 meridian 
 
 The subject of sidereal time may be thus illustrated : 
 
 In Fig. 5 let the small circle 
 represent the earth, and the 
 large circle the equator of the 
 great sphere viewed from the 
 north, the plane of the paper 
 being the plane of the equator. 
 Let P be the pole, A a point on 
 the earth's surface, and P A 
 the meridian of A. y is the 
 first point of Aries, S and S^ Fig. 5. 
 
 two stars, and s and s* the points where their declina- 
 tion circles meet the equator. Now the arc y s^ (or the 
 angle y P s*) is the right ascension of Sj, and the arc 
 Y s^ s that of S. Now suppose the earth (and therefore 
 the meridian P A m) to remain fixed, while the outer 
 circle and stars revolve around it in the direction of the 
 arrow; and at the instant that it is mean noon on a cer- 
 tain day at A let the position of the great sphere be as 
 shown in the figure. The arc ;* s^ m will be the sidereal 
 time of mean noon for that day at A. The star S will be 
 on the meridian at an interval of sidereal time after mean 
 noon corresponding to s m, while the star S^ has passed 
 the meridian by an interval corresponding to m Sy, and 
 by reducing these intervals to their equivalents in mean 
 time we shall have the mean times of their transits. For 
 
 r 
 
Hour A ngle of a Star. 
 
 29 
 
 \ 
 
 H' 
 
 instance, suppose we had to find at what time the pole 
 star would be at its upper transit on a day when the 
 sidereal time of mean noon 
 was 2ih. 30m., the right as- 
 cension of the star being taken 
 as ih. 15m. Now the state 
 of things at noon would be as 
 shown in Fig. 6. The star 
 would have passed the meri- 
 dian by an interval of 2ih. 
 jom. — ih. 15m., or 2oh. 15m. 
 (sidereal) and would there- pig^ c 
 
 fore be on the meridian at ah. 45m. sidereal, or sh. 44m. 
 23s. mean time after noon. 
 
 Sidereal time is usually found by calculating the hour 
 aVigle of a star from its observed altitude. This, added to 
 the star's right ascension if the hour angle is west, or 
 subtracted from it if east, gives the sidereal time. From 
 this the mean time can be obtained, if required. The 
 watch time at which the altitude is observed must, of 
 course, be noted. 
 
 TO FIND THE HOUR ANGLE OF A GIVEN STAR AT A GIVEN 
 TIME AT A GIVEN MERIDIAN. 
 
 Here we must find the local sidereal time of the given 
 instant and take the star's right ascension from the Al- 
 manac. The difference between these two quantities 
 will be the srar's hour angle, which will be east if the 
 star's R. A. is greater than the sidereal time, and west if 
 the contrary is the case. 
 
 TO FIND THE MEAN TIME BY EQUAL ALTITUDES OF A 
 
 FIXED STAR. 
 
 Fixed stars are employed for this purpose in preference 
 to the sun or planets because of the change in declina- 
 tion of the latter. A star should be chosen which de- 
 scribes a sufficiently high arc in the sky. Two or three 
 hours before its culmination its altitude is taken with the 
 
 
30 
 
 Mean Time by eqnal Altitudes. 
 
 f 
 
 f. 
 
 sextant or theodolite, the exact watch time noted, and 
 the instrument left clamped at that altitude. Some hours 
 later, when the star has nearly come down to the same 
 altitude, the observer looks out for it (keeping the instru- 
 ment still clamped) till it enters the field of view of the 
 telescope, and waits till it has exactly the same altitude as 
 before, when he again notes the watch time. The mean 
 of the times of equal altitude will give the watch time of 
 the star's culmination, which should be the same as the 
 mean time (previously calculated), corresponding to the 
 star's right ascension, the latter being the sidereal time 
 of the culmination. If they are not the same the differ- 
 ence will be the watch error. 
 
 If the theodolite is used for this observation the verti- 
 cal arc only^s^kept clamped. When the star has nearly 
 come dowfi^o the ntiVnTd altitude the horizontal arc is 
 clamped and its slow motion screw used. 
 
 TO FIND THE LOCAL MEAN TIME BY AN OBSERVED ALTI- 
 TUDE OF A HEAVENLY BODY. 
 
 For this problem we must know the 'latitude of the 
 place, and, if the sun is the object observed, we must also 
 know the mean time approximately in order to correct its 
 declination. 
 
 The altitude should be taken when the heavenly body 
 is rapidly rising or falling— that is, as a rule, when it is 
 about three hours from the meridian, and the nearer to 
 the prime vertical the better. 
 
 If we take P as the pole, Z the zenith, and S the hea- 
 venly body (Fig. 7), PZS will be 
 a spherical triangle in which PZ 
 is the complement of the latitude, 
 PS the polar distance of the ob- 
 ject observed, and ZS the comple- 
 ment of the altitude. The three 
 sides being given we can find the 
 three angles from the usual for- 
 mulae. In the present instance we Fig 7. 
 
 /I 
 
 f 
 
Timely Altitude of Sun. 
 
 31 
 
 /I 
 
 want P. which is the h";;;;:;;;^,^;^,-;^— ; 
 
 A convenient formula is 
 
 Sina~= !HLi?rPS)^ (s-PZ) 
 2 sin PS sin PZ~ 
 
 wheics is ?^±PS+ZS 
 
 S\stt:^:n"°Vh'^ ",^^'^^^"* ^* ^^^ ^-^-^ 
 
 to the altitud ; ndihe an^P hr""l""^ ^" ^^^"^^ 
 is divided by i, Thl /"^ ^'"" ^^'"'^^^ ^^^ 
 
 body. In tllZ o^t sTit "wil^b^ T' ^"^^^ °^ *^^ 
 time, and by adding Z IT ^ *^^ apparent solar 
 
 of time we sh jl "f Z'l ^'^^S the corrected equation 
 the observation ' "" '"''" ^^'"^ °^^^^ ^"^tant of 
 
 If the body is a fixed star or nlanet th.r. t 
 known right ascension we subtract hrhn *^'"'/T '*' 
 east, or add it if it is west Th u ^"^'' '^ ^* '^ 
 
 of the instant from l^Jh , J ^'"'^ *^' ^'^^^^^' ^^"^e 
 if required TheTn^ ' ""'"" *''"^ ^^" ^e inferred 
 
 •'astronomicaUrlangle '' " ^"^"^'^ ^^' '^ ^^^ ^ ^^e 
 
 The Ian of the a tS " .^'^ *'"^ ^' ^^^^ "°'^^- 
 tude to corresDonH .1 " *^'" '^^^" ^^ ^ ^i^gle alti- 
 
 sit theodol Ts "std two' rr/'*'^ ^^■'"^^' ^^^'<^tran- 
 versed pos ions of the M '^°"'' '^^ ^^'^^^ '" ^e- 
 
 - to co^rrectTst^t*^ r^^^^^ P^- - 
 
 - obtained by observing both an east aif" "'^^"^"^^ 
 takmg the mean of the results .! ^''''* '^^' ^"^ 
 refraction and nf ,\: ? ' ^ ^"^'"^ °^ observation 
 great measure ' '"'""^"^' ^^^" '^^ ^^^ "d of in a 
 
 EXAMPLE OF WORKING OUT A SKXtav^ ,, 
 
 Equation of t/^' I 1 r?""'^' ^'■- '''"■ ''=■ '■«• 
 e»t time. I„drV?oV't^-L^° be subtracted from appar- 
 
^T 
 
 
 I 
 
 P 
 
 33 Example. 
 
 Double altitude 64° 4' o" 
 
 Index error c or. 
 
 , 2)63 58 30 
 
 /^ / 
 
 ■ <-^- f^ A^^-e^ 31 59 15 
 
 a^> ^ <i/..^^pemi-diameter 15 57 
 
 ■'^ Kefraction and parallax ... i 07 
 
 True altitude of sun's centre 32 13 49 
 
 90 
 
 n ,• ,. '^° ° ° '^^ 57 46 ii-ZS 
 Declination 10 40 o 79 20 o :=PS 
 
 45 46 20= PZ 
 79 20 o , 
 
 2)182 52 31 
 
 90 O O 
 
 Latitude... 44 13 40 g^ 26 15=5 
 
 ■ 79 20 o 
 
 45 46 20 
 
 91 26 15 12 6 T5=s_ps 
 
 Logsin(s-^l)i%.||44-7oo- ^' '' ''='~''^ 
 
 " (s-PS)= 9.3215800 
 
 Log cosec PZ =10.1447400 
 
 cosec PS =10.0075700 
 
 2)39-3283600 
 
 i9-664i8oo=log sin 27" 19' +10 
 
 2 
 
 54 58=P 
 
 c .• r ■ ~3h. 39m. 52s. 
 Lquation of time = — o 34 
 
 True mean time =3 3^ 18 
 Watch time 3 ^y je 
 
 Watch slow im. 3s. 
 
^^^ g h Star A Ititude. i^ 
 
 EXAMPLE o^coK^^:^^^^^rr^^^~^^^ 
 
 SINGLE ALTITUDE OF A STAR. 
 
 the'^aldtudetf ^"'l "' ' ^^'^^ '" ^h. 30m. west longitude 
 
 To find the watch error— 
 
 '^^' ?J^\"^^* ascension was 4h. 29m. 43 
 Add hour angle J 30 17 
 
 ^^^®^^^'t™e of the instant = b"~Jg ^ 
 24 
 
 ""•: 
 
 Subtract the sidereal time of ^°^^ ^' 
 mean noon, corrected for 
 longitude 
 
 '^■' o p 
 
 Sidereal .nterval since mean ~~ 
 noon o 
 
 •:: i. 59 12 
 
 And the watch was 2m i6s fast ^^"'" ^^' '" '"^^" *''"^- 
 
 C-— -°- ."Sir.':; :ii:'a^ 
 
 Sin 8-^= 2°_l£iJn_(£ii_«) . 
 
 2 cos yi sin PS 'W^ere a is the altitude, X the 
 
 latitude, PS the polar distance, and 5=^'' + ^? 
 
 TO FIND THE TIME BV A MERIDIAN TRANSIT OF A 
 HEAVENLY BODY. 
 
 urvey. rhe theodolite is set up on the line, 
 
34 Time by Meridian Transits. 
 
 the telescope directed on a distant point or mark on it, 
 and the horizontal plate clamped. The telescope will 
 now, if moved in altitude, keep in the plane of the meri- 
 dian, provided the instrument is in adjustment ; and the 
 instant of transit of any object across the vertical wire or 
 intersection being noted, we can deduce the true time. 
 
 As the altitude of an object at transit is equal to the alti- 
 tude of the intersection of the meridian and equator 
 plus or minus the declination of the object, we have the 
 equation 
 
 Altitude = 90° — latitude ± declination. 
 and can set the telescop^teforehand at the required 
 altitude. If the latter is more than 50° a diagonal eye 
 piece is necessary with most; instruments. In the case of 
 the sun we may either take the mean of the observed 
 instants of transit of the east and west limbs, or take the 
 transit of one limb and add or subtract the time required 
 for his semi-diameter to pass the meridian (which we 
 obtain from the Almanac). We now have the watch time 
 of transit of the sun's centre, which takes place at appar- 
 ent noon, and have only to find the true mean time of ap- 
 parent noon by adding to or subtracting from the latter 
 the equation of time (corrected for longitude), when the 
 difference will give us the watch error. 
 
 Example— At Kingston, on the 2nd of May, 1882, the 
 transit of the sun's west limb was observed at iih. 55m. 
 A. M. What was the watch error ? 
 
 Here we have 
 
 Watch time of transit of limb iih. 55m. os. 
 
 Time of the semi-diameter passing the 
 
 meridian ini. 6s. 
 
 Watch time of transit of sun's centre iih. 56m. 6s. 
 
 The equation of time, corrected for longitude, was 
 3m. 11.5s, to be subtracted from apparent time. 
 
 I 
 
 Htm 
 
OS. 
 
 f 
 
 _, '^^Mertdtan Transits. 
 
 Apparent time of transit"^unTcentre '"17h' oi^" 
 
 Equation of time om. os. 
 
 T, 3m. 11.5s. 
 
 1 rue mean time of transit ~ [ 
 
 Watch time of transit "h-56m.48.5s. 
 
 "h. 56m. 6.0S. 
 
 Watch slow ~- 
 
 In the case ofa Star itc: riLkf" ' . 42.5s. 
 
 time of .he ins.an „ f " /nfi ' a'dT" '\*' '"""'' 
 
 (rasrt «( Gnenwich, correcting i, f , f P°"'"°° "' 
 
 directed in the explanX':?, the Ld"'""'^ '" '"^ ^'^ 
 
 TheplanofthrowingtheSof* *^^ ""u'^" ""'""'■ 
 Object „a. is obJeJonaVlll/ittV^rridr-^" "" 
 
 other. "P" P'™'= ''^'"S higl'er than the 
 
 mo^n^r^trarpt^eSr^^ire^t"-"^^^ 
 
 pole are the worst. ^°'^ "^^^^^t the 
 
 l\ 
 
 6s. 
 
CHAPTER IV. 
 
 I I 
 
 METHODS OF FINDING THE LATITUDE, LONGITUDE, AND 
 
 MERIDIAN. 
 
 TO FIND THE LATITUDE BY THE MERIDIAN ALTITUDE OF 
 THE SUN OR A STAR. 
 
 The altitude may be taken with the theodolite or sex- 
 tant. The approximate direction of the meridian should 
 be known beforehand. If the theodolite is used the in- 
 strument is levelled, and the telescope directed on the 
 object a little before it attains its greatest height. The 
 horizontal wire is then made to touch the object (the 
 lower limb if the sun is observed) and is kept in contact 
 with it as it rises by means of the slow motion screw of 
 the vertical arc, the telescope being moved laterally as 
 required. When the object has attained its greatest 
 altitude it will remain for a short time in contact with the 
 wire, when the vertical arc is read off. The telescope is 
 then at once turned over, the upper plate reversed, and the 
 altitude again read. The mean of the two readings will 
 be the apparent altitude of the object. 
 
 When using the sextant and artificial horizon we bring 
 the two images into contact and keep them so by the slow 
 motion screw till they cease to separate, when the vernier 
 is read off. 
 
 The usual corrections having been applied, and the true 
 meridian altitude of the sun's centre or star thus obtained, 
 the latitude is found as follows : 
 
Latitude by a Meridian Altitude. 
 
 57 
 
 nn!;? ''T' V'u *^^ °^J''* ^'''"'■^^^ culminate at~ the"op. 
 posite side of the zenith to the visible pole. 
 
 in Fig. 8 let A be the observer's 
 position, p k q pi e -e, section 
 of the earth passing through A, 
 and the poles {p pi) and therefore 
 «n the plane of the meridian. 
 
 Let O be the earth's centre and 
 \eteOq be perpendicular top pi; 
 then e and q will will be the inter- 
 sections of the equator with the meridian. W H A R 
 ouchmg the earth's surface at A and also in the pfant of 
 
 nd win f H "" ^r"' ■'" ^" ^^^ P^-^ °^ the hor on 
 and will he due north and south. Let S be the object 
 observed and let its declination be north. Draw A P 
 parallel to ^ /.^ and A Q parallel to e q. A P wiU be the 
 d.rect.on of the pole of the great sphe're. and A Q tha of 
 
 OAtT 7 °'-''' "^"''^" ^"^ ^^-"-t'^^- Join 
 O A and produce it to Z the zenith. A Z is at riht 
 
 angles to H R and P A Q is also a right angle S A k i 
 he me ed altitude of the object and S a'q its declfnl! 
 A O . 7 \n'''"i' °'^ '^ '''' ^^^ A ^ - the angle 
 
 the altitude of the visibl^poTe. Hell w! hav"';^''^' '^ 
 
 Latitude=ZAQ=9o"-QAR=9o°-(S A R-S A Q) 
 
 =90 --altitude + declination. 
 If the object had south declination, as SS we should 
 have (since S« A R is its altitude and S^ A Q its d cHna 
 non) Lat.tude=ZAQ=9o«-Q A R=go-(s'rR " 
 Q A b»)=9o— altitude-dedination. 
 
 fi/u^'ln^lh ""' '''•'"''' '' '' ^'"^^^ ^^^t to draw a 
 hgure. In the one given / is the north and p^ the south 
 pole. ^ 1.U 
 
38 
 
 Latitude. 
 
 li 
 
 i 
 
 c, 
 
 
 s\.?, s 
 
 
 
 and case. If the object culminates between the zenith 
 and the visible pole, as at S in figure g, its altitude will be 
 S A H, and we shall have : 
 
 Latitude =P A H = S A H— S A P 
 
 = S A H— (90°— S A Q) 
 =altitude + declination — 90°. 
 
 If the object is a star 
 which never sets, but de- 
 scribes a diurnal circle round 
 the pole, it will cross the 
 meridian twice in the 2.; 
 hours, and we may take its 
 altitude at what is known as 
 its lower transit, as at S?, 
 Fi^. g. Here we have : 
 
 Latitude = PAH = S^'\H 
 + S* A P=altitude + 90° — Fig 9- 
 
 declination. Therefore, in the case of such a star we 
 have: 
 
 Latitude= star's altitude ± star's polar distance ; the 
 positive sign being taken if the star is observed below the 
 pole, and vice versa. 
 
 Case 2 can only apply to the sun when A is within the 
 tropics. In many books on astronomy the formuloe of 
 case I are made to apply to the sun in every situation, 
 whereas they manifestly fail when he culminates between 
 the zenith and the visible pole. 
 
 In the Nautical Almanac is given a very simple method 
 of finding the latitude from an altitude of the pole star 
 taken at any point of its diurnal circle round the pole. 
 The time of the observation has to be noted and the cor- 
 responding sidereal time calculated. 
 
 LONGITUDE. 
 
 Longitude cannot, like latitude, be measured absolutely, 
 
 4^ 
 
 i 
 
 / -n 
 
 r\^ft,.. 
 
«i» 
 
 \ 
 
 Longitude. 
 
 as it has no natural zero or origin, and we have'tTTss"^ 
 an .n.t.al mendian arbitrarily, the English adopting thai 
 o Greenwch But the difference of longitude of two 
 pi es ..n always be found. The simplest n.ethod of 
 doing this .s by comparing the local time at the two 
 places for the same instant. This is done by signa of 
 some kind or other, such as flashing the sun's'ray's from 
 station to station, or by the electric telegraph. 
 
 Since the earth revolves through 360 degrees of hour 
 angle ,n 24 hours it will pass through 15 degrees in i hour 
 That ,s when it is one o'clock in the afternoon at a certain 
 
 ea t of It. h fteen minutes and seconds of longitude in arc 
 
 tt w Th '' 'v °"^ "'""^^ ^"^ ^^^-^ °^''-^ -P - 
 
 Th r- Vl^ ^P?'"' '° ''^''^"' ^^ ^^" ^« to mean time 
 rhat.s If the sidereal clock showed i honr at one placTu 
 
 wrtir\"""'^'!"°^'^^- (T^'^-^W--^,.L^ 
 . IS wor h thinking out, for it b often a puSetobeX^ 
 
 Therefore, if at a preconcerted signal the observer atTwo 
 
 stations note the exact local time, either mean or s der II 
 
 he difference of the two will give the difference of long .' 
 
 tude Ordinary watches may be used if their exact rate 
 
 and their error at any given instant are known. The 
 
 the irsf T""' " '^ telegraphing star transits. If 
 he eastern observer signals at the instant that a certain 
 star IS on the meridian, and the western observer no " 
 he time of the signal by his sidereal chronometer and 
 afterwards takes the time of the star's transi at hfs 
 own station, the interval of time between the two ralit 
 allowing for the clock's rate, will evidently give the differ 
 ence o longitude. If the eastern observer note the fme 
 
 statoVThT''"'''^"^^^"" ^'^"^^^^ ^he transilat hi 
 station, the same result will be obtained, and by taking 
 
 the mean any time lost in the transmission of the signals 
 
 W.11 be corrected ; for it is evident that in the hrsf cat 
 
 the time lost will make the difference of longitude too 
 
 / '<.<i ». 
 
40 
 
 Longitude. 
 
 small, and in the second case it will make it too large. 
 By means of certain contrivances it is possible to register 
 the instant of a transit to a small fraction of a second, 
 and if a number of observations are taken the mean of 
 the results will be very near the truth. 
 
 Since an error of one second in the time will throw the 
 longitude out by about 360 yards in latitude 45° it is evi- 
 dent that for surveying purposes great care must be taken 
 to insure accuracy. When the local times are compared 
 by flashing signals a large number of observations should 
 be made and the results compared. 
 
 The subject of longitude will be more fully gone into 
 hereafter. It may be mentioned here that sailors obtain 
 their longitude by finding the ship's local mean time by 
 an altitude of the sun when the latter is about three hours 
 from the meridian, and comparing it with a chronometer 
 keeping Greenwich mean time, the latter being noted at 
 the instant the altitude is taken. It seems almost need- 
 less to remark that when using chronometers tiie correc- 
 tion for rate must always be applied. 
 
 METHODS OF FINDING TIIE MERIDIAN. 
 
 TO FIND THE AZIMUTH OF A HEAVENLY BODY FROM ITS 
 OBSERVED ALTITUDE. 
 
 This is a very similar problem to that of finding the 
 hour angle from an altitude; the only difference being 
 that, instead of finding the angle P of the triangle P Z S, 
 we have to find the angle Z. We have, as before, the 
 three sides of the triangle given, and may therefore use 
 the formula 
 
 Sin» ~ = 
 
 ^ - Sin (s—Z S) Si n (s— Z P) 
 2 
 
 Sin Z S Sin Z P 
 Another formula that may be employed is 
 
 a 
 
 ti 
 
 V 
 t£ 
 
 sc 
 la 
 ti< 
 ra 
 ed 
 of 
 tai 
 vei 
 
 • i-:.^^si »: m '' m> ' -ss im 
 
Azimuth by an Altitude. 
 
 41 
 
 Cos» 1^ Cos 5 Cos (s-S P) Sec; Sec a 
 
 where a is the altitude of the object. S Pits polar dis- 
 tance, X the latitude, and s= "+'* + ^± 
 
 ve>^^ ^^^^^^.^.^^.r^ort^ce to sur- 
 ^"^h as alSl^^e' "" ^*-^^'"^"th instrument, 
 of any line Z A (Fie Vo : ^'^^^^^^""^'"'cal bearing 
 directing the tel scope on th"e L°""' "J''^ "^^ ^^ 
 horizontal plate reading and Then" ""'' *'''"^*'^ 
 urmng it on the heavenly body and 
 
 S^r'd-'"'"'; ^"' the'horilTal 
 plate reading. It is better to repeat 
 
 the observation in reversed positions 
 of the instrument and take the mean 
 eneorf°'"^^^^ ^^^ediffer- 
 
 llne and 5h T'''"'^^ '""^^"^^ °" the 
 hne and the heavenly body gives the 
 angle A Z S, and the triangle P7^ u !^ "' 
 
 the angle P Z S, whence vSh a "?"" '^'"^"^ ^'^«« 
 bearing, and therefore Z P fh^".^''^ ^ -^ P the required 
 In taking an alt-Xnth of .k ''''°" °^ *^^ "^^"'^ian. 
 altitudeonf, we mu"" ^^'s fbUct' th "^ '^'^ ' ^'"^^^ 
 to get the altitude of the centre rfn' f"^'"^^^-^*^- 
 vertical and horizontal wire the sun! " '" ^ 
 tangential to both. To ^et the Z%^^^^ '' '""^^ 
 semi-diameterwemustmnf. 1 u ^""^^ correction for 
 Jatter by the seTanT .f T ? ^ '^" ^^'"""^^ ^^^^e of the 
 tions ar^ got ri<CoCv?nftr'^' ^°^' ''^'^ --' 
 rants of the crosVLre" Th^t^ °^P°"^^ ^"^^■ 
 
 edge of the sun tangential ^o on^ JJ '" ^' *° ^^^P °»« 
 of aslow-motion scfew ^ the o,h ^', ^'"'^ ^^ "^^^"^ 
 tangential. Thus, weight let th ' '' '"°"^^ ^^^° 
 vertical wire a ittle Zd J .^ '"" °^"''^P the 
 "ttle and keep ,t tangential to the 
 
42 
 
 Azimuth by an Altitude. 
 
 horizontal wire by the vertical slow-motion screw till it 
 just touches the former. If 
 the wires of the theodolite are 
 arranged as in Fig. ii we take 
 the observation as follows. 
 Suppose the time to be fore- 
 noon and the apparent motion 
 of the sun in the direction of 
 the arrow. For the first ob- 
 servation get the sun tangen- 
 tial to the wires a b and e f 
 in the uppper position. This ^'fi'' "• 
 
 is done by making it overlap a 6 a little, and using 
 the vertical arc slow-motion screw to keep the lower 
 edge tangential to the horizontal wire e/ until the sun also 
 touches a b, when the verniers are read off. The instru- 
 ment is then reversed and the sun made tangential to the 
 two wires in the lower position, this time using the 
 horizontal plate slow-motion screw to keep the edge tan- 
 gential to a b. The mean of the two altitudes is taken 
 and also that of the two horizontal readings. The time 
 must also be noted so as to correct the declination. The 
 reading of the horizontal plate when the telescope is 
 turned on the referring mark (A) is taken both before and 
 after the sun observations. 
 
 Ex. At Kingston in latitude 44° 13' 40" o" the 3rd of 
 March, 1882, at 2h. 3°"!. p.m., or ^h. 36m. Greenwich 
 mean time, two altitudes were taken of the sun with a 
 transit theodolite in reversed positions for the purpose of 
 testing the accuracy of a north and south line, the hori- 
 zontal arc being first clamped at zero, and the telescope 
 directed northwards along the line. 
 
 READINGS ON SUN. 
 
 Altitude, Azimuth. 
 
 ist observation— 31° 8' 220"' o' 
 
 2nd •' 30 16 220 16 
 
 Mean 30 42 220 8 
 
 BttdPVWiRIlKfWWPMi'MK 
 
 ^-fym 
 
i 
 
 Azimuth by an Altitude. 
 
 43 
 
 To Correct the Altitude. To Correct the Declination. 
 
 30 42 o' Decimation at Mean) ^o 
 
 Refraction- 136 Noon at Greenwich ^ 44' 37" S 
 
 Parallax+- 8 Correction fory^hrs. 
 
 Truealtitudeao 40 32 at-57". 5 per hour} 7 3i S 
 
 True declination 6 37 6 S 
 
 90 
 
 Formula used ; 
 
 Sun's N. P. D.=96 ^y 6 
 
 Cos.2-^=cos. s. cos. (s— S P) sec. yl sec. a 
 
 **= 30° 40' 32' 
 ^= 44 13 40 
 S P= 96 S7 6 
 
 2)171 
 
 31 
 
 18 
 
 s= 85 
 
 96 
 
 45 39 
 37 6 
 
 s-SP=.io 
 
 51 
 
 27 
 
 log COS s= 8.8687314 
 
 ogcos(s— SP)= 9.9921540 
 
 ogseca =10.0654637 
 
 log sec A =10.1447380 
 
 2) 39.0710881 
 
 , 19-5355440 
 =io+logcos69°56' 
 2 
 
 ^=139° 52 
 360 o 
 
 Sun's Azimuth= 220* 8' 
 
 The direction of the line was therefore true. 
 The formula — 
 
 PZS 
 Cos2-- =cos s cos (s-PS) sec X sec a 
 
 where PS is the sun's (or star's) polar distance, a its alti- 
 tude, ; the latitude, and s=l^^, is thus derived. 
 
 We have, in the triangle PZS, if ^'- P'^+PS+ZS 
 
 2 
 
 Cos8?^z= ?HLil!i2jLz:PS) 
 
 ^ 2 sin PZ sin ZS 
 
 Sin (s'-PS)=cos {9o-(.s'-«i^S)| 
 
 ■ (I 
 
44 
 
 Meridian by Equal Altitudes of a Star. 
 
 =cos 
 
 180-PZ-ZS + PS 
 
 2 
 
 X+a+FS 
 =cos =cos s 
 
 2 
 
 COS (s-PS)= cos9°-^^+9°-^S-PS 
 
 2 
 
 — ^^= i«« PZ+PS+ZSl . , 
 
 = cos jgo [ = sins 
 
 Therefore cos»^^= cos s cos (s-PS) 
 2 cos X cos a 
 
 Similarly it may be shown that 
 
 sin*-^-= ^QS ^ s in (s—a) 
 2 ~~ cos ^ sin PS 
 
 TO FIND THE MERIDIAN BY EQUAL ALTITUDES OF A STAR. 
 
 Select a star which describes a good large arc in the 
 sky, and having levelled the theodolite direct the tele- 
 scope on it about two hours before it attains its greatest 
 height. Clamp both arcs, and by means of the slow mo- 
 tion screws get the star exactly at the intersection of the 
 wires. Having taken the reading of the horizontal arc, 
 leave the vertical one clamped, loosen the upper horizon- 
 tal plate, and look out for the star when it has nearly 
 come down again to the same altitude. When it enters 
 the field of view follow it with the telescope, using the 
 horizontal slow-motion screw, but still keeping the verti- 
 cal arc clamped, till it is exactly at the intersection of the 
 wires. Now read the horizontal plate : the mean of the 
 two readings will give the direction of the meridian. Set 
 the plate at that reading and send out an assistant with a 
 lantern. Get the latter exactly at the intersection of the 
 wires, and drive in pickets at the lantern and theodolite 
 station. 
 
 This method is rather a tedious one, but it mav be 
 shortened by observmg the starwheri nearer the meridian. 
 
%* 
 
 Meridian by Transit of Pole Star. 
 
 be 
 
 45 
 
 TO FIND ^^HRinUN B AX OBS^^^::^^;^, THE POLE 
 : e^ STAR AT ITS MERIDIAN TRANSIT. 
 
 Ascertain the watch error bv anv of +ho ^- 
 
 i ' pole f 1° V'. rf "*?"' ^'"'^^ ^''°- - ''^'ow 'he 
 
 » pole. If the theodohte telescope is directed on it at thi, 
 
 .nstan. we shall evidently have the meridian Le prUd 
 ed the .nstrument ,s in good adjustment. But it s betler 
 n order to eliminate instrumental errors, to proceed ^ 
 follows : at some definite time before the star wiU be o" 
 the mend,an-say. minutes-direct the telescope on ^ 
 and take the reading of the horizontal plate. Reveri 
 
 Tnthk ., "•= '=5™ ""^™l of time after the transit- 
 in th.s , <^..,^ce 4 mmutes after the first observation-and 
 
 TO FIND THE MERIDIAN BY THE GREATEST ELONGATION 
 OF A CIRCUMPOLAR STAR. "'^CATION 
 
 nni^^!f '' ^ ""^'^ ^''"'"^*' "^'*^°'^- S*^" ^hich. like the 
 pole star, are very near the pole, owing to their slow 
 mo ion appear to n.ove vertically for some ht tZ 
 when at their greatest eastern or western elongation. We 
 will suppose the pole star to be the one observed. Aboul 
 s^x hours before or after the transit (the time of which 
 Z:u h' ^r.T^' calculated) the theodolite is carefully 
 levelled, its telescope directed on the star, and the hor^ 
 zontal plate read. The operation is th;n repeated n 
 reversed positions of the instrument and the mean of the 
 two readings taken. If we have previously taken the 
 horizontal plate reading when the telescope was turned 
 onsome well defined distant object as a referring wo k 
 we can now obtain the azimuth of the latter as follows • 
 
 t* II BfijiJl^ U 
 
' '' ■' I 'w-W | (i'^ ^ i iiM Mi »m i wi..i 
 
 t I 
 
 46 
 
 Meridian by Greatest Elongation. 
 
 Fig. 12. 
 
 In Fig. "" J let the plane of the paper 
 
 represent t le plane of the horizon, and 
 
 let Z be the observer's position, A the 
 
 referring mark, P the pole, and S the star 
 
 at its greatest eastern elongation . P Z S 
 
 will be a spherical triangle, right-angled 
 
 at S, and we shall have : 
 
 „. „ ^ Sin P S 
 
 Sin P Z S=^. — 5-^ 
 
 Sin P Z 
 
 or, if 8 is the star's declination and X the 
 
 latitude of the place : 
 
 SinPZS=^i4 
 Cos / 
 
 since P S is the complement of the declination, and 
 
 P Z the complement of the latitude. The latitude need 
 
 not be very accurately known. 
 
 Now, having from this equation previously found the 
 angle P Z S, and having obtained A Z S from the plate 
 readings, we get at once the angle A Z P, which is the re- 
 quired azimuth. 
 
 If we have to use a star some distance f-om the pole 
 we must calculate the time of its greatest elongation by 
 solving the equation. 
 
 Cos Z P S=cot 3 tan X, 
 which gives us the star's hour angle, and hence the time 
 of the observation. 
 
 The altitude is given by the equation. 
 
 sin^ 
 
 Sin. altitude: 
 
 sin d 
 
 If it is inconvenient to observe the pole star at its 
 
 greatest elongation we can use the following formula 
 
 which is approximately true in the case of a star very near 
 
 the pole. 
 
 tan A> • -7 Tj c 
 
 ;;: 7-=sin Z P S 
 
 tan A 
 
 where A' is the star's azimuth, Z P S its hour angle 
 at the time of observation, and A its azimuth at greatest 
 elongation. 
 
 ■>_ 
 
 lu^ui^fm-miui. tn— r-in--Ti-iiTi-— r — r ntK tir'nninr-iin— ii-ni-i>wwTlr:itiiim i i t 
 
J^''^'^^"«« h Hifrh and Low Stars. 
 
 47 
 
 TO FIND THE MERIDIAN BY OBSERVATIONS OF HIGH AND 
 
 LOW STARS. 
 
 This is a very useful method, as it is independent of the 
 pole star, and can therefore be employed in the southern 
 hcnusphere where that star is not visible. 
 
 Choose two stars differing but little in right ascension 
 oneof wh.ch culminates near the .enith and the othe; 
 near the south horizon (or the north horizon if in the 
 o hern hemisphere.) Level the theodolite very care 
 
 of the Vr ^"'' "^'^^ ^"^P^ °"^ ^^^ *^^ collimation Hne 
 of he telescope W.11 coincide with the meridian at the 
 ^enith, however far U may be from it at the hori.or • and 
 
 the field T"*"^^ "'^'" -'^ ^^"^^^ -" -°^« the cent're of 
 he field of view at nearly the same time as if the ele 
 
 horizon Having^L^;,^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^ 
 
 stars will cross the meridian observe the tranlit of fZ 
 upper star, noting the watch time. Th s wm give the 
 watch error approximately, and we shall now knTw the 
 
 transit. By keeping the telescope turned on that starti 
 that mstant arrives we shall get it very nearly n th" 
 plane of the meridian ; and by repeating the process with 
 another pair of high and low stars we sh^all have the di^c 
 tion of the meridian with great exactness. 
 
 For this method we require a transit theodolite fitted 
 with a diagonal eye piece. The nearer the upper stars 
 are to the zenith the better. ^^ ^ 
 
 The Canadian Government Manual of Survey recom 
 mends for azimuth the formula : ^ 
 
 tan. P Z s=^^LPA55?jii!nAP^S 
 i-tanPStan/lcosZPS 
 as applied to observations of the pole star- but it r^ 
 quires special tables in order to work it out 
 
i WW,' ejl H P H I ^ ^i» B^.i ! . 'i i , - i"^ flB|BWWp W WWHBWllimwP 
 
 48 
 
 Meridian by Pole Star. 
 
 The following is the proof of this formula : 
 We have the fundamental formulce — 
 
 1 
 
 f sin fl sin C = sin c sin A 
 
 I ^ cos c — cos a cos b 
 
 cos C= ; ; — r 
 
 sm a sin b 
 
 COS. a — cos b cos c 
 
 cos A: 
 
 (I) 
 (2) 
 
 (3) 
 
 sm b sm c 
 
 From (3), cos a cos 6=cos^ b cos c-(-sin b sin c cos 6 cos A 
 ^, cos c — cos a cos b 
 
 From (i & 2), cot C = -; -. — j-—. — -^ — 
 
 riuiii v* «. -a/, sm a sin 6 sm C 
 
 cos c — cos' b cos c— sin 6 cos b sin c cos A 
 
 •.tan C = 
 
 sin b sin c sin A 
 sin b sin c sin A 
 
 sin' b cos c — sin b cos 6 sin c cos A 
 cosec 6 tan c sin A 
 
 iii 
 
 I — cot b tan c cos A 
 In the triangle P Z S let P S=c, Z S= a, aud P -Tlrrfc 
 
 Z=CandP=A 
 
 Then— 
 
 cosecPZtanPSsin^PS 
 
 tan l'^S-^_^^^p2tanPScosZPS 
 
 tan P S sec ^ sin Z P S 
 
 ■ I— tan P S tan ;i cos Z P S 
 
 t 
 t] 
 w 
 
 w 
 eq 
 ha 
 sh 
 tai 
 
OS A 
 
 OS A 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 SUM DIALS. 
 
 thrown on anv olanp «nrf=„ ''«<=earm, its shadow 
 of the sun alwaCn. ll """' '^" S'ven hour angle 
 be the sun's d™Hn 1" ' t^T T '^'" ''"" "■'^'"" 
 Poin, in .h. line Slve asVhetT"'.'"^ "^"'"'^ 
 will always lie in .he same straitlt H„« f" ™™'' "" 
 
 a"gk. On this principd al f„ ! ? '"'' «""" '"'" 
 
 The position of th'e sh?dow 1:: h^^.s'^r'™^'^- 
 at the instanf anri fi, r • "" ^ '^our angle 
 
 •tae; so tha in^"!',"::^^;';:"*-;- ""e .>^.„„, ,„L 
 >.ave to applv the equatL ofTme ""' """" "»' "' 
 
 .he°,ltercas?r"LH'*".'"'r°"'^' " -'->• ^ 
 
 thrown on a ho^'o'a, Ite ttheT^ " '= ""^''- « 
 wall. P ^^ ' '" *^^ Matter on a vertical 
 
 equator the d'al wonM evidertl ""^ "' ""^ P°''^- A' the 
 having a hori.orta 'edg 'S'™^'!,' "' % -"'-' P'a.e 
 shadow lines would be P^a fd fo he ,L ar/tt ' ^'^ 
 'ances apart for equal intervals of 'ti^ Cu d'"; ^^ 
 
 mm 
 
50 
 
 Sun Dials. 
 
 I 
 
 increase according to the sun's distance from the meridian, 
 and would become indefinitely great when he was on the 
 horizon. 
 
 At the poles the stile would be a fine vertical rod, from 
 the base of which 24 straight lines, radiating at mtervala 
 of 15 degrees, would indicate the hours. The line on 
 which the shadow was thrown at the time corresponding 
 to Greenwich mean noon might be assumed as the zero 
 or 24-hour line. At other places the stile must be set so 
 that its angle of elevation above the horizontal plane is 
 the same as the latitude of the place. 
 
 HORIZONTAL DIALS. 
 
 A horizontal dial generally consists of a triangular 
 metal stile fixed on a horizontal plate on the top of a 
 pillar. Fig. 13 is n elevation and Fig. 
 14 a plan. The angle of elevation of 
 the stile is made equal to the latitude 
 of the place, and if the variation of the 
 compass is known, the latter may be 
 used to get the dial with its stile in the 
 plane of the meridian. The hour lines 
 on the plate are marked out thus : let 
 Fig. 13. A B (Fig 14) be the base of the stile. 
 
 Fig. 
 
 14. 
 
and A its south end. Draw A C so th^t n x~r~ 7~ 
 the ,ati.„de and at any point^C^irSt C B^r 
 
 "ne E B F pTpta'Lfa,".; Isn'MtT^rfT' 
 D », D .., D b. D 4., &c., n,ee,i„g E B F in . j'!"" 
 and n,akh,g ,ha angles B D ., b'd a'. I S ^.^ a, b ,." 
 ac, each equal to 1=; detrrees Fr^r^ a j y ^ u , 
 lines .H.on,2 a. , „.,^, r%.::rj t^^e'^t 
 i'nes : A . for 9 A. m., A t for lo a. m., A a for „ am 
 and so on The proof of the correctnes of this con't'ruc" 
 tion ,s easily seen by imagining the trianele A R r , I, 
 turned round A B till i. is perp^endicil r tttha pLe" of 
 he paper or dial plate, and the triangle c D c'T K 
 turned up on . .. till it abuts on B C when D w n ° 
 cde wuh C, and A C will be parallel lortepoIaT^isTd" 
 perpendicular to the plane of D cc'. 
 
 When the divisions on the line E B F run off the niaf . 
 we contmue them thus: In A C (the , p m 1 n.l , \ 
 any point », and through it draw a H e para ieHo^ S 
 9 AM. l,„e) meeting A 6., A .. &., fn A >' & and 
 make », equal to .A o ,• to op^, &c.. and ttiugh'; ," 
 
 onlhfothrsTdt"""" "™= '"'"= -orninghour lines 
 
 VERTICAL DIALS. 
 
 These have the advantage that they may ^e made nf n 
 very large size and placed in conspic L ^osl dot 
 There are vanous ways of constructing them As^Zle 
 
 .^ trnro'f '^ ^°,f^ \''' ''-'' havi^gaLndh^t 
 It, m front of a wall with a southerly aspect. (Fig. 15.) 
 
1 
 
 i 
 
 52 
 
 Vertical Sun Dials. 
 
 Fig. 15. 
 
 The disk should be roughly per- 
 pendicular to the sun's rays at 
 noon about the equinoxes. The 
 The bright spot in the middle of 
 the shadow of the disk on the 
 wall indicates the hour. Tb' 
 hoi- lines are found thus: At 
 the time the sun is on the meri- 
 dian mark the position of the 
 bright spot on the v/all. Let A 
 be the hole in the disk and B 
 the spot. Measure A B. Through 
 B draw B C vertical, and draw a line B D so that B D is 
 equal to A B, and the angle C B D to the sun's polar 
 distance minus the co-latitude. Make the angle B D C 
 equal to the supplement of the sun's polar distance. It fol- 
 lows from this construction that if the triangle BCD were 
 turned round B C till it touched A the points D and A 
 would coincide, and C D (and therefore the imaginary 
 line C A) v^ould be parallel to the polar axis. Now take 
 a watch, set to noon at the time of the sun's transit, and 
 mark the positions of the spot on the wall at the success- 
 ive hours. Straight lines joining these points with C will be 
 the hour lines. 
 
 Of course a large triangular stile CAB might be 
 substituted for the disk ; o- we might use a rod C A fixed 
 in the plane of the meridian, and having the angle A C B 
 (which it makes with the verticaf equal^ to the co-latitude. 
 
CHAPTER VI. 
 
 THE REFRACTING TELESCOPE 
 
 other. The former 1h ' '"'' " ^^= Pi"'^ =" ">e 
 
 objec. a. i.s foZi:; ^31" ^.rjs' ™^^^ °' '"» 
 
 tographic camera and th. ^- ''"' °' " P^o- 
 
 "u. ifihe .eSpe -^ :ar:er.: s"h""fH'''^r '^"^^ 
 natural position a 00™^™!"™ of fo 7 °''''" '" "^ 
 by means of which tt^Tu^T^ "' '""""^ '= 'mployed, 
 This has. however tl!e H? . ""^^^ " ^«='" '"^"'^d- 
 much ligi, and L '1 '^"f."^"'^^'' "f <^utlin^ off too 
 
 land objfct;. '' "'"' '" """" '^'«-°Pes and for 
 
 "ne^tivZ-'in^LHrh tte" '^ ''-'7 '■''"<''•• «-' '»^ 
 t»o lense; of the et pLe "^h" '"T^" '"'""" "'- 
 "^ed in telescopes desi/ned for Th " "" "'"" ^=™""->' 
 objects without makTnf „/ ■""" examination of 
 
 "positive," in whkh h! Z T"'"' ^"""-"J"' 'be 
 
 is outside the eye pLee rr rf'''^'™'="=^^ 
 
 '---Wean?-teto;rrra;:i:rs 
 
54 
 
 The Telescope. 
 
 plane at the common focus of the object glass and eye 
 piece. The position of the focus of the former depends 
 on the distance of the object — that of the latter on the 
 eye of the observer. The one is the same for every indi- 
 vidual. The other has to be adjusted to suit the observer 
 — short-sighted people having to push the eye piece in, 
 while those who have long sight require a longer focus. 
 
 The larger the object glass is the more rays from the 
 object are collected on the image, and the brighter it is. 
 The greater the magnifying power of the eye pic. e the 
 more apparent are any defects of definition in the image. 
 
 The magnifying power of the telescope is measured by 
 
 the fraction 
 
 focal length of object glass. 
 
 Thus, if this 
 
 focal length of eye piece, 
 fraction were 4, the linear dimensions of the object seen 
 through the telescope would be four times what they 
 would be when vjewed with the naked eye. Therefore^, ^, 
 for a given eye piece, the longer the telescope is.^he" 
 smaller will be the field of view, or portion of the earth 
 or sky visible. 1 he angular diameter of the field is, in 
 fact, the angle subtended by the diameter of the eye 
 piece at the centre of the object glass. 
 
 In large telescopes the field of view is so small that it 
 is necessary to use a "finder," which is simply a small 
 telescope attached to it so that the axes of the two shall 
 be parallel. 
 
 A diagonal eye piece is one in which there is a mirror or 
 prism between its two lenses by which the rays of light 
 are turned at right angles and emerge from the side instead 
 of the end of the eye piece. It is used for observing 
 objects when the altitude is so great that it would be 
 uncomfortable or impossible to look up through the tele- 
 scope tube. 
 
 Lenses have to be corrected for chromatic aberration and 
 spherical aberration. Take the case of an object glass con- 
 
 -7^ 
 
 P 
 it 
 
 ar 
 na 
 
 gh 
 m] 
 pr: 
 

 The Telescope. ' 
 
 have different foci tL u °[ '^^'^"Si^ihty would 
 
 other. Such a lens is calle/ ..■r;^hr:Sic!" """" '"" 
 
 By "spherical aberration ' ;.. mpai-l th. Hi. 
 rays caused by the central pc-, ^of let „ ^ T" " 
 surfaces having a different focu. om its ou J Ir '' "'I 
 
 St c^bitTor'^^ ^^ "■' -CeTtrr -r 
 pro;tiy"r:tedr:ifri'st °ut^^ ^'-= ^- ■!- 
 
 Spherical aberration is detprt^ri k, 
 portion of the lens wi h a ctc'la^dTrT*'^""*^^^ 
 
 focusing it on an obie.r .V . ^ °^ P^P^'" ^"^ 
 6 1 uu dn ODject, afterwards removmo- *i,^ ^ i 
 and covering the oiitPrr^orf -^u . "^ ''-'"oving the disk 
 
 .he focus o.'ZTZZT'ZT'''''''' "'-- -»- 
 
 If one part of the object pla<?Q f, .c: o ^•«- 
 power from another pa a b ^ht star w.'u Tr' "'"f"^ 
 .nadiation, or m„ft at one side '^'^'" "'"' "" 
 
 THE MICROMETER 
 
 anjuiLTtrcr itis^r'rr- "--r^--" 
 
 nary theodohte, placed In ,e common fo^rofl'" "j" 
 glass and eye piece of a telescopror of the ' "d"' 
 microscope ■• which will be described pittlvTb'' 
 Pnncple of the micrometer is simply thisfrpte tha 
 
 I 
 
'.Wf 
 
 MMM-»k^.. 
 
 m I 
 
 56 
 
 The Micrometer. 
 
 a point— such as the intersection of the cross wires-can 
 be moved across the field of view by means of a screw. 
 Let a be the angular diameter of the field, and let n be the 
 number of complete turns of the screw required to move 
 the wires through this space ; it is evident that one turn 
 
 of the screw will move them through an angle ^ 
 
 The head of the screw should of course have an index to 
 mark the commencement and end of each turn. If the 
 head is made large enough to enable its rim to be divided 
 mto m equal parts we shall have the means of measuring 
 
 ^" ^"^'^ l^nr ^y fuming the head through one division. 
 Thus, by making the thread of the screw sufficiently fine, 
 and Its head large enough, we have the means of measur- 
 ing small angles to an ^ktreme degree of accuracy, pro- 
 vided we know the angular value of one turn of the screw. 
 This may be ascertained by finding how many turns it 
 takes to move the wire across the image of an object of 
 known dimensions at a known distance. A levelling rod 
 will answer the purpose. The length of rod moved over 
 divided by the distance, gives, of course, the chord of the 
 angle subtended. There is usually a scale in the field of 
 view, the divisions of which correspond to the turns of 
 the screw. 
 
 Fig. 16. 
 
 There are several different forms of micrometer. The 
 accompanying figure {16) represents the one known as the 
 filar (or thread) micrometer. Two parallel wires m m, 
 
The Micrometer. 
 57 
 
 ^* slides .v,H„ a: r: .e'dSrr tH- ^"-^ ^^™^ 
 
 the wire w w, and is mnv J k Tu ^ ^'"^"'^ '^ ^^"'^s 
 
 which has a graduated r 1 t^r^tL^'- ^'^ '^^' °^ 
 '"oved by the screw B. In the ovZ ""''/ '' ^ ^"^ ^'^ 
 
 2onta] wire at r.VJ^f , ' opening of « is ;; hori- 
 
 "av. ,0 ;Ls r fh :„TLVd° l'^ °'!:"^- ^"PPo- -« 
 
 ->tal wire. If „o,v the screw A " .r„e7tnr ' '"'"• 
 one star, and B till n n cut« th? .V , '" " '^'"^ 
 
 •ween the two is measured J ,^ "■'. """ *^'''"« be. 
 
 and fractional div" .^n^ofa t'„™ ItTakes'^t'-- "' ^ 
 to » n. This is not theexact m.,f i / ""«^ "" ™ "P 
 
 "„, it serves to illnstr^e the prtadple ''""''"" ''""'"^^' 
 
 THE READING MICROSCOPE. 
 
 for reading the facH ai part^ o^f hT^' °' "^™'" 
 graduated circles ofl-,™.-. divisions of the 
 
 is fi«d, the ciS VZ'IZZTTL t^ """°="°p^ 
 
 ■nstrument and moving with it Th ''°P' °' '^^ 
 
 one screw and moveabk f ame J*? ™"°'"^'" has only 
 of cross-wires in the common foculahTr^' T'^ 
 and eye piece of the microscone Tl? '^"^ «'"' 
 
 used in exactly the same w!*^ 1^'^ cross-wires are 
 'elescope. only that thToh^ "• """'^ "^ " "-eodolite 
 arc, on which fh micrt eoolm Tf '^ ""^ S^-<i„ated 
 To make the matter cTearTe ^ffl' t° feTT ' "' '°''"'''- 
 measurement of a horizon,.] "' ^. "" '^^'^ of the 
 the arc of which is Sa'd'f '' " '"^' """"o'"' 
 
 <hat oneturn ofth^ij ort,rsc°rew isT'"', """'"'^^ 
 "■nute, and that its head ^^1 j 7 equivalent to one 
 
 have thus the me^ns of meas" fe. "tt '° T"^- ^' 
 seconds. The circle with it a "fh d ,7* ° '° ""«'' 
 vo.ved, and the cross-wires of thT^t^rdTtrLl- 
 
 li 
 
:ax. 
 
 
 58 
 
 The Reading Microscope. 
 
 with one of the objects. On viewing the arc through the 
 microscope (which it must be remembered is a fixture) 
 the wire intersection of the latter must be made to coin- 
 cide with one of the divisions of the arc by means of the 
 micrometer screw, and the reading of the index of the 
 latter noted. Suppose the arc reading to be 10° 20', and 
 that of the screw head 15". Now move the circle and 
 bring the telescope to bear on the other object. The 
 cross-wires of the microscope will probably fall some- 
 where between two divisions of the arc, say between 50* 
 30' and 50* 40'. Turn the screw till the cross-wire is on 
 the 50* 30' division, and suppose that it takes between 
 three and four turns, and that the index marks 25'. The 
 micrometer wire will have been moved 3' 10", and the true 
 reading of the second object will be 50* 33 10". The 
 angle measured is therefore 40° 13' 10". 
 
 Two or more reading microscopes are placed at equal 
 distances round the circle, and the readings of all taken. 
 Errors due to eccentricity are thus got rid of, and those 
 due to faulty graduation and observation much diminished. 
 
 THE SPIRIT LEVEL. 
 
 The spirit level is used, not only to bring certain lines 
 of an instrument as nearly as possible into a horizontal 
 position, but also to measure the deviation of these lines 
 from the horizontal. For this purpose the glass tube is 
 graduated, usually from its middle towards both ends, 
 and the reading of the ends of the air bubble noted. The 
 length of the bubi .0 depends upon the temperature, and 
 the latter should therefore be also noted. 
 
 To obtain the value of one division of the level — that is, 
 of the vertical angle through which the level must be 
 moved in order that the ends of the bubble may be dis- 
 placed one division — a simple plan is to rest the level 
 upon some support (such as the horizontal plate of a 
 theodolite) that can be moved vertically and which is con- 
 
 ^■■- i 
 
 ) 
 

 The Spirit Level. 
 
 59 
 
 n«,ed„ith a telescope. The plate is levelled, the tele- 
 scope directed on a vertical measuring rod set up a- a 
 known distance and readings taken of the ends of the 
 
 .he r^d^Tht ' h'^ "'"""'"" °f ""= ■'""-■"^l -i- «Sh 
 the rod. The whole arrangement is then moved vertically 
 
 by means of the foot screws till the ends of the bubb e Save 
 
 ^TofL'Tr """"" °"ivisions-say xo. T read- 
 ing of the telescope wire on the rod is now noted The 
 
 ^fesThrch" rd f^n' "^''"^^' '"''^' '^y "' "ttaJce 
 
 frtht'dSd°;'t;r:th:Tar "°r v '=-'' 
 
 CM uy iu gives the value cf one division. 
 In the case of the level of the transit telescope at the 
 Royal Military College ,t was found that at a dTs an e tf 
 383 feet a vertical movement that displaced the bubble 
 20 divisions altered the reading on a levelling saffo.i 
 t!f . r l"'"'""^ '^'='^™^' S've 0.0000313 as the 
 tangent of the subtended angle for one divLon, wh ch 
 made the value of the latter 6-.45. 
 
 J''l''VT °^ ^ ""'''"^ '«"^'' if "' <■«'. or the surface 
 
 other hand if the legs are of equal length, but the surface 
 of the level A and the o.Tef B. yhriev;i'eror tr^re 
 
 2f^:rel-:t-iL-\s?f-di- 
 
 greatest m one position. B will be greatest bv the same 
 amount on reversal. ' ^^^ 
 
 especially in the case of the more delicate levels which 
 eas ly get out of adjustment. The amount of slopelf the 
 surface tested by the level is obtained thus: Take Jhe 
 
 "iiMlfr'-f 
 
t^ntmtt?mm»i»^uaami»i^:' 
 
 I 
 
 i '! 
 
 60 
 
 The Spirit Level. 
 
 case of the pivots of a transit telescope. Placing the level 
 upon them take the readings of the bubble ends, and call 
 the reading next the west pivot W and the other E. 
 Then reversing the level take the readings over again and 
 call them W^ and E^ Thenumberof divisions by which 
 the bubble is displaced by the difference of level of the 
 pivots is given by the formula : 
 
 W + W^— (E+E^^ 
 4 
 To find the actual slope of the pivots we must multiply 
 this quantity by the value of a division of the level. 
 
 The level error is obtained separately by simply chang- 
 ing the signs of W^ and E^ in the above formula, when 
 we have: 
 
 , , W— Wi— E + EJ W-E— (Wi~En 
 Level error = = i-I- tL. ' 
 
 4 4 
 
 Of course if W+W ^ = E + E 1 there is no slope, and, in 
 practice, when the level is out of adjustment, we may get 
 the points of support horizontal by raising one of them 
 till this is the case: For instance; if W were «o and E 
 10, W^ would have to be 10 and E^ 20. 
 If the level is in adjustment we must have 
 
 W— E=Wi— El 
 In this case we have only to take W and E and the 
 slope is obtained from the formula 
 
 W E 
 
 X value of one division 
 
 Example — Take W=25, E=io, Wi=ri5, E»=20. 
 Value of one division =6". 
 
 Here we have '^ + ^g-io- jp^ jo^ 
 4 4 
 
 Multiplying this by 6" we have 15" as the slope, the v. est 
 pivot being the highest. 
 
 The level error is — ^^^^ io-f-20 ^ ^n__ „ 
 
J 
 
 ^ ^g Chronometer. i 
 
 two positions TherfL ,. °' '■^^'""S^ '■•' the 
 
 i...^ a. the L endirr;:; J ' --„i^>''''"-f 
 
 readings will give the slope. ^^^^ ""^ *^« 
 
 tail^7o?d»i«t^l:",j2t^ "^'' ^--" "' -- 
 wh];Hr^t?„Vh":Lott';;iiS'''' =-^-' <-> 
 
 by means of the ad- -tin, '^'^''■"•'°>"'- Then, 
 
 both its ends read ^tZ ' ""°'= '"= ^'■'^'>'' «" 
 
 THE CHRONOMETER 
 
 ourf^'nTa^^ranSSrh r ""'"' ^'^^ ""•" 
 changes of ,emperatu™have. he?"'r° "'^''™'^''^ "■" 
 the time of its osc llation ?» P"'"'"''"'''" "P°» 
 
 structed to Iceep either "l^^'''""™'^'"^ ""^X be con- 
 used on board BriSh shil "' ''"f^'' '™e. Those 
 wich mean time The Jea'-rnf"''' 't^''°" <^'-»- 
 that it should keep a regjlar rate th",' "^T"™"^"- '^ 
 0"ly gain or lose a certf.n 12 ', "' ""' " ^'""'W 
 •his can be depe^ ed on ^ cfn T" "™- " 
 the true time at any instant h, T ^^^ ascertain 
 numberofdavsandhoaJst.lr''''?''"^''''' '*'= ^°' «he 
 error of the chronom r ^L la" d^ "^'"^ *"""•"" 
 by comparison with other cZnteterroXt """"^ 
 mical observation Th« r, "'"eters or by an a rono- 
 
 -re perfect ir.he c^ronrir ris^^, "'= "'P' '"« 
 venient to have a small than^a^^rge rltrtfalTr^- 
 eight daT'T^errr"^"^ ""^"^ '° -" ^""er tw^ or 
 seventh day. IttiZlTrr"^'"'' ""^ '>«- e-ary 
 "P at the rlgula: in e7:ra ' fie tr'™.'" '? " "' 
 -ed part of the spring c^m^f t'to'X, Tnd' ir^ 
 
 I'm 
 
 t 
 
ll 
 
 J 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 i 1 
 
 62 
 
 The Elecho Chronograph. 
 
 larity of rate may result. If a chronometer has run di-^vn 
 it requires a quick rotatory movement to start it aftt' ,'t 
 has been wound. 
 
 Transporting — On board sbip chronoireters are allowed 
 to swing freely in their gimba;-. so that t^.y may keep 3 
 horizontal position ; but en land they should be fastened 
 with a clamp. Pocket chrononieters should 'ilways be 
 kept in the same posifion, and if carried in the pocket in 
 the day shou'd be huag up at night. 
 
 Chronon;eiers h.ave usually a different rate when 
 travelling from WiuU: they keep when stationary. The 
 travelling rate r, ^y be found by comparing observr'tions 
 for time taken ai the same place before and after a 
 journey, or fro in observations at two places of which the 
 difference of longitude is known. 
 
 For mean time observations an ordinary watch may be 
 used by comparing it with the chronometer, provided ihe 
 rate of the watch is known. 
 
 Chronometers are generally made to beat half seconds. 
 
 THE ELECTRO CHRONOGRAPH. 
 
 Under this head may be included all contrivances for 
 registering small intervals of time by visible marks pro- 
 duced by an electro magnet, and thus recording to a 
 precise fraction of a second the actual instant of an 
 occurrance. By this means an observer at a station A 
 can record at a distant station B the exact instant at 
 which a given star passes his meridian, and thus the 
 difference of longitude of the two stations may be ascer- 
 tained. 
 
 REFLECTING INSTRUMENTS. 
 THE SEXTANT. 
 
 A person accustomed to work with the pocket si ^ nt 
 will have little diffit in using the larger kint ■ the 
 
 latter, with its adjai,.»i;ents, is so fully describe :^ most 
 
 J 
 
 - ' i 
 
 IL 
 
J 
 
 The Sextant. 
 
 63 
 
 OntnT .:"^"^>';"^;hat little need be said ^ho~:^^^r^, 
 
 of.erc. ,,,,,t::r:2 
 
 or with a plate of glass floating on the mercurv Th;' 
 
 oof. when one haif of a set of observa.io,. has been ,aken 
 the roof should be reversed end for end R„r ,t I 
 
 sun. double altitude the da. glasl ^the ^ pt^,^ 
 
 e:c^tj;;:t::h^.f^-- 
 
 noted when the circles just touch. As this requir s h" 
 he images should be receding from each other he lui 
 tude of the lower limb must be taken in the for noon and 
 of the upper limb in the afternoon. For a lunar distance 
 of the sun direct the telescope on the moon and use one 
 or more of the hinged dark glasses for the sun The 
 
 A common fault of the sextant is that the optical power 
 of the telescope :s too small. There is httle use in beTng 
 ab e to read the graduation to .0 seconds if the eye cTn 
 not be sure of the contact of the images within 30^ 
 
 THE SIMPLE REFLECTING CIRCLE 
 
 This is Simply a sextant with its arc graduated for the 
 Ic rt"""T"°''""'^'^"^^^'^^^h^-dexarmp o- 
 
 at h enT Th'' ""'''''1 T'"^^ ^"^ carrying a vernier 
 a each end. The mean of the two verniers can be taken 
 
 g t dd T'tT ^"' ^"^ '-'- ''- ^° eccentricity^!;:: 
 got nd of. This arrangement also tends to diminish the 
 errors of graduation and observation 
 of i^r reflecting circles have three verniers at intervals 
 
 .jM 
 
64 
 
 The Repeating Reflecting Circle. 
 
 THE REPEATING REFLECTING CIRCLE. 
 
 In the repeating reflecting circle the liori^on glass 
 
 (m Fip, 17), instead 
 of being immovable, 
 is attached to an 
 arm which revolves 
 about the centre of 
 the instrument and 
 which also carries 
 the telescope (0 and 
 a vernier (v). The 
 index glass (Af) is 
 ^'^- ^7- carried on another 
 
 revolving arm, which also has a vernier vK The arc is 
 graduated from 0° to 720° in the direction of the hands of 
 a clock. To use the instrument the index arm is clamped 
 and its reading taken. The telescope is then directed on 
 the right hand object (6), the circle revolved till the 
 images coincide, and the telescope arm clamped. The 
 index arm is then undamped, the telescope directed on 
 the left hand object (a), and the index moved forward till 
 the images again coincide, when its vernier is read. The 
 difference between the two readings of the index vernier 
 IS twice the angle between the objects. This repeating 
 process may be carried on for any even number of times. 
 The first and last readings only are taken, and their 
 difference, divided by the number of J*p**i4i©»8, gives the 
 angle. If the angle is changing, as in the case of an alti- 
 tude, the result will be the mean of the angles observed, 
 and the time of each observation having been noted the 
 mean of the times is taken. 
 
 This instrument will not measure a greater angle than 
 the sextant. Its advantages over the latter are that there 
 15 no index error, and errors of reading, graduation, and 
 eccentricity are all nearly eliminated by taking a sutKcient 
 number of cross-observations. 
 
 f, 
 
 <■ ' /.i^. 
 
 i/<-. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,' 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 bi 
 
J 
 
 about 4,' """f """""'lescope arm at an angle of 
 
 ^ei.h. :/it;:,-,:':e<,';r„^t; LiT'^r ^^*» 
 
 altitude, of Ob;:" ^^L'lhelrUh. """ '"' '"""^ ^°""« 
 
 In ,t, ™-^ '""■SMATIC REFLECTING CIRCLE 
 
 I fixed prismatic reflector (/) 
 
 which halfcovers the object 
 klass. The index mirror 
 (w) IS carried on an arm 
 which revolves round the 
 centre of the circle and has 
 a vernier (v v^) at both 
 ends. This instrument will 
 I measure anj-les of any di- 
 'mension, and has also the 
 following; advantages: (i) 
 Eccentricity is completely 
 I eliminated by using both 
 Fig. i8. verniers. (2) Thp rpfl«,<f^^ 
 
 ■■nages are brighter than in the case o other Xt 
 
 :rr:r:raiSrjt'''^™-"---^ 
 wa^^ri^^rniajit':;^"-^^^^^^^^ 
 
 The pnmalic sextant differs from the circle in havin, 
 
 n;i^::r£:^;:t:!t:^nfs:^y"- 
 
 them, „■& Chauvenefs Astronomy ) °' "='"^ 
 
'mm»v^KiiMmi 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 TffE PORTABLE TRANSIT INSTRUMENT. 
 
 The transit instrument is a telescope with two trunnions 
 resting on Y-shaped supports so thnt its line of collima- 
 tion may move in a vertical \ lane, and is used for the 
 purpose of taking the times of transit of heavenl> bodies 
 across that plane — generally either the meridian or the 
 prime vertical. In the former case it enables us to find 
 the true local time, either mean or sidereal, and also 
 serves to determine the longitude by means of transits of 
 moon-culminating stars. Ir. th.. latter case it gives us a 
 very accurate method of ascertai'^ ing the latitude by 
 transits of stars ac ss the rrime v tical. 
 
 In the focus of the telescope are one or two horizontal 
 wires, and an odd number of equi-distant vertical ones— 
 generally five- jf wh.Ji .ne central rhould be in the opti- 
 cal axis of the instrument, and at righ: anghs to the a'is 
 of the trunnions or pivots; and if, in -' ,.uon, this axis is 
 truly horizontal, the line of colli' \tion vill move in a ver- 
 tical plane. The telescope is ovi 'ed with a ver cal 
 graduated circle, with a level a cht which serves as a 
 finder to set it at any required avigle of elevation. It v>hs 
 also a diagonal eye piece for transits of objects of consid- 
 erable elevation, and a very delicate striding level for 
 getting the pivots perfectly horizontal. At night the light 
 
 b 
 
 g 
 c 
 
 fl 
 
 P 
 w 
 
 ti 
 re 
 e I 
 
 f "I 
 
The Transit TcUscopc. 
 
 . 67 
 
 of a lantern is thrown into the interior ,r. ,11 • T 
 
 w,res by „,eans of an opening v^,h"len° """""= "■' 
 
 »..d to u.: r„;iVoTanVht"^:3i::f::-.rt -"-■ 
 
 server calling ortoo" r,h T- ''"■°"°'"^'"-' ">= "b- 
 In the case rf the un 1 'T T^'" '=^='> «'-• 
 
 noted is when the %":» 7.^ k' "'""^'^ '"^ ■"''^■" 
 Hther in connng :;t% tt^^T^tZ "^ "'!,■ 
 for Its semi-diameter to na« ,1, _■ "* required 
 
 w^ds added or sub^a ^ed, ."' ""=?'';'." ''> ?"- 
 
 The first adjustment to be attende/^;= ,l\ r " 
 n^ation. This may be effected bTttinVth . r"'" 
 
 on some well-defined distant objecf or ^ ^^^ ""'" 
 
 - - at its greatest elongat on 'xh; tel." ' "f^TP^^^^ 
 verscH in its supports, e'nd Z Jt^^TiiT ''"' "■ 
 bis.crs the object, the collimation is aH n^h V^f^^ 
 one side of it must be moved tova dth-,/;^ '^"^ *° 
 val by the limation screws The iL. ^' '"*"'■ 
 
 moved laterally by means 7iLl '"^^'•""^^"t is then 
 
 one of the V 'sup^ ^ilUhT^ire^^ J^^^^^^^ 
 when the telescope is again reversed and th. °^J''*' 
 
 peated till the collimation is perfect ^'°'"'' '"■ 
 
 The horizontality of the axi? nf f h^ • 
 by the striding level and fooTslw " 'If th" ^'"T'^ 
 generally an error of it. „, T '. ^^ ""« '««■ has 
 
 change (Ling to^Ltelt'ionsT tl^p til"" "1" '<- 
 flexure, &c.) it will be fnnn^ '^'"Pe'^ature, accidental 
 
 pivots by getting the!n in^ such a ^^1^? 'T' ''^ 
 will have equal but opposite read^ntf *^" '^"^^ 
 
 tions. Thus, if in one ^^si ion !hf ^ . '" J"'""'"'^^ P°^'- 
 reads xo, while the west end t .Th „ " /^'^ ^f ^^« 
 e .St end should read 12 and the west xo ''''"' *^' 
 
 '^. 
 
r»m 
 
 68 
 
 The Transit Telescope. 
 
 9 1 
 
 1 
 
 If one of the pivots has a larger diameter than the 
 other it is evident th;. when their upper surface is level 
 their axis will not be so. This will entail a constant 
 error which will be investigated presently. 
 
 Thi verticality of the central wire must be tested by 
 levelling the pivots and noticing whether the wire re- 
 mains upon the same point throughout its whole length 
 when the telescope is slowly moved in altitude. 
 
 If the collimation is out of adjustment, but the level- 
 ling correct, the line of collimation will sweep out a 
 cone. If the collimation is correct but the levelling in- 
 accurate, it will describe a great circle, but not a ver- 
 tical one. If both are right it will move in a vertical 
 plane. We have now to make this plane coincide with 
 some given one— say that of the meridian. The north 
 and south line may have been already approximately ob- 
 tained by means of a theodolite, and we can now find it 
 exactly by one of the following methods. 
 
 (i) By transits of two stars differing little in right as- 
 cension, one as near the pole, the other as far from it as 
 possible. Let a be the right ascension, 8 the declination 
 and t the observed clock time of transit of the star near 
 the pole; «S ^S and t^ the same quantities for the other 
 star, d the azimuth of the instrument — in other words, 
 the error or deviation to be determined — and tp the lati- 
 tude. Then d is found from the formula, 
 
 , f , , . ,,, „ I cos ^cos ^' 
 d= Ha> — «)- 
 
 -it^-t) 
 
 ) cos f sin (S — d^) 
 
 The rate of the clock must be known, but not its error; 
 the interval t^ — t must be corrected for error of rate; and, if 
 a mean time watch is used, converted into sidereal time. 
 d being in horary units must be multiplied by 15 to ob- 
 tain the error in arc. 
 
 If the declination of the southern star is sruth it will. 
 
J 
 
 The Transit Telescope. g_ 
 
 ton L? :r'v ''""""';' P^" °f '"'^ f°™"'> »' King. 
 on (Lat. 44 ,4, .^ o.oj;, fo, .^^ .^^^^ ^^.^ ^^ ^^^^^ S= 
 
 .he'd'e'*r^?eni;;r '7 '"-'" " too ^.V^ ^ 
 safes. .0 draw aCelThtcfr "'""^ " ''^^'^^-^ 
 
 the instrument is known. ^''*^"" ^"^^"^ 
 
 To prove the formula: 
 
 J cos tp snT?^^ 
 
 cos ^p sin (^~5') 
 
 ^}^zJ^!;' ^^ P°'^' ^ the zenith. 
 ^ ^B the plane m which the teJe- 
 
 scope moves, and A Z A- the tn.e meri- 
 dian. Wr ' " - 
 
 aza». 
 
 have to find the angle 
 
 Let S and S^ be the two stars at 
 transit, . the unknown clock error, t 
 the clock time when the star S was on 
 
 i 
 
 '*g- 19 
 
M 
 
 I 
 
 70 
 
 The Trantit Telescope. 
 
 the meridian. The true time of the star being at S will 
 be t-\-e. 
 
 Let a be the R. A. of the star. Then a was the time 
 when the star was on PB; .*. Z P S=^+^— a. 
 
 Let f be the observer's latitude, d the star's declina- 
 tion, d the deviation of the instrument. 
 From the triangle P Z S we have; 
 
 Sin S Z sin S Z B=Sin P S sin S P Z (i) 
 
 And Z S=P S— P Z very nearly=y»-<5 
 .-. sin {<p — 8) sin ^=sin {t-\-e~-a) cos 8 
 or (sin tp cos 8 — cos <p sin 8) d={t-\-e — a) cos 8 
 or (sin <p — cos f tan 8) d=t + e — a (2) 
 
 If a' , 51 be corresponding quantities for star S* we have 
 
 (sin ^— cos <p tan c^) d=t^ +e — a» (3) 
 
 In equation (3) t^ includes the correction for the clock 
 rate between the observations. 
 Subtracting (2) from (3) we have 
 d cos <p (tan J— tan 8') = t^—t—{a'—a) (4) 
 
 Now tan 5-tan d^ = s'" (^'-^') 
 
 md- 
 
 -«) 
 
 cos O COS o 
 
 cos 8. cos 8' 
 
 1 1 — i— (a— « , . : --_ 
 
 i 'J cos f. sm (5—5' 
 
 It is evident from equation (4) that for a given value of 
 d the quantity t^—Ha^—a) is larger as tan 5— tan 5' is 
 larger. In other words, one of the stars should be as near 
 the pole and the other as far south as possible. 
 
 Equation (1) may be put in the form 
 
 Sin Z P S = 
 
 i sin Z S 
 
 cos 8 
 
 As the angle Z P S is the error, in time, of transit, 
 caused by the azimuthal deviation d, this equation gives us 
 the means of correcting a transit where it has not been 
 convenient to correct the meridian mark. 
 
 TO FIND THE ERROR DUE TO INEQUALITY OF PIVOTS IN 
 THE TRANSIT TELESCOPE. 
 
 In Fig. 20 let A C, B D, be the diameters of two un- 
 equal pivots, E F their axis. If the side A B on which 
 the feet of the level rest is horizontal, the lower side 
 
 r 
 
Inequality of Pivots. 
 
 CD will b. inclined a. a cer.;;;;;;^;;:::;:;;;;;^^ 
 
 will be inrlinpH .,♦ 1 « 
 
 will be inclined at an angle 
 
 /'/. 4» 
 
 If, now, the instrument be 
 reversed in the Y's. A B will 
 evidently be inclined at an 
 angle 2 a, which will be given ^^ 
 
 by the level readings in the usuaHST 
 
 rherefore, the inclination of the axk in tK. « * • • 
 will be one auar^Pr +h . ^ne axis in the first position 
 
 Mih-tary College tLfi% >nstrnment at the Royal 
 
 thickest m? i ""^^^ P'''°* ^^'^^ f°"nd to be the 
 
 uiicKest, moving the bnhhlp a a- • ■ •■" uc lue 
 
 Tllerefore. when th;!m„ %* ""°"' °" '"=>'"5»1- 
 
 their lower surfaf. "^ "", ° "' "'' P'™*^ ™= '^vel 
 
 theiraxTforo IVr,'"^ "=" ''"^ '- ^visions, and 
 
 corrected fo eh ' value of on T- '"'' "'"'f'"^' '^ '"' 
 Pi"0t highest bvthr^l ^ ""'"' '•-«•■• ^'h »"=« 
 
 error wiU b fl t^t""™!.""" ""'"" •="'• '"e total 
 pivot is highet^and': ■ :t:r "■' '"°-- '^''^" '"' «"^- 
 
 -0 APP.V THE LEVEL COaRECT.ON TO AN OBSEEV„,ON 
 
 The l,v ■ ™ "■= ™-*"=" ^'•'^SCOPE. " 
 
 .■el!;:„:ai,t£:'t;fr^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 Now^'iJ'--'^_''^'"SR 
 
 Sin P 
 
 Sltl. 
 
 Sin R 
 
 cos^decjination 
 R 
 
 and P =JLgi j^- altitud e 
 COS. declinatron 
 
 Jiltitude 
 P 
 
 li 
 
 S' 
 
 r 
 
\ 
 
 I 
 
 ( 
 
 72 
 
 The Level Correction. 
 
 West 35 
 West 55 
 
 The correction for the transit in time will be-— - 
 
 15 
 
 Example— At Kingston, Canada, the transit of Arcturus 
 was observed, the level readings being : 
 
 ist position East 45 — 
 
 2nd " East 25— 
 
 To find the correction in time. 
 Here we have 
 
 Latitude 44* 14' N 
 
 Star's declination 19 47 N 
 
 Star's altitude at transit 65 33 
 
 Level correction = 35±55_:^5zl25 ^^^ ^ ^.^.^j^^^^^ 
 
 west end being highest, and the pivot correction altered 
 this to 6 divisions. The value of one division of the level 
 was 6".45, therefore the angle R was 38".7 east of the 
 meridian, and the transit took place too soon. 
 
 P = H X 38". 7 = A^y". 2, and the correction was 
 2.48s. to be added to the observed time of transit. 
 
 When the instrument is in perfect adjustment the error 
 of the watch or chronometer can be at once obtained by 
 means of meridian transits, as described at page 34. 
 
 FINDING THE LATITUDE BY TRANSITS OF STARS ACROSS 
 THE PRIME VERTICAL. 
 
 If S is a star on the prime vertical, P the pole, Z 
 the zenith, and W Z E the prime 
 vertical, S P Z is a right-angled 
 triangle ; and if we know the 
 angle S P Z and the side P S we 
 can find the side P Z by the 
 equation Fig. 22. 
 
 Cos S P Z=tan P Z cot P S 
 
I 
 
 Prime Vertical Transits. 
 
 or. If a IS the star's right ascension, /the s^^^^^7^~^ 
 Its crossing the prime vertical d ilT/ v ^ °^ 
 
 i^ the latitude of the place ' ^^^^^'n^tion, and 
 
 re.u Cos(«_0=cot^tan5 
 
 •It the star is in thp nncit,/^,, c / 
 
 the equation becoLr '" *"' °' "*' »="<''-'» 
 
 Cos (<— a)=cot ». tan <J 
 
 vMiS':hr::n:it:itte''f;r^ ^"^ ^"">'''^' p- 
 
 observation may be m»T ^1 ™'" ''" ''°°™- The 
 instrument oTwUh TtntZ ™h'V^ """^"^ "»=" 
 other delicate ,«»!<,:' latrude ?' '" '''^' " '" 
 
 Sin. altitude =^L 
 sin ^ 
 
 (Since cos P S = cos P Z cos Z S ) 
 
 exc^rth^^flls'edecl-r^^rb t*"^ ''""' -"-' 
 latitude of the place Th I ^ " ""'" ^"'^ *' 
 
 zenith are to be preferred h "" "'"""""^ "=" ">= 
 observed time of ^;S^:^//;C-:-;'-^ in the 
 
 telescope clamped'at n^' L^es t? b"'''°'=' ^"? *^ 
 horizontal arc If „„ , ' ""^ ""^ans of the 
 
 transit telescope L nre Ld" d'"'. ^''^ "" """^"^ 
 (from the approximate l,,rH,u°'""' '' '° '='''<="'="'= 
 which culn^'nyersTver d ; : 3t„:r^f :l '^'"^'^ =" ='" 
 cross the prime vertical, a.,d d ec'Tl \° '""'"'" 
 
 that instant. It will now be „ea Iv if^r °" " " 
 position. The emr m i ""any m the required 
 
 -ethesiderea,reoTL::i.t;:X^:^-- 
 
 -r*^- 
 

 J 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 
 74 
 
 Prime Vertical Transits. 
 
 east and the west verticals. The mean of the two will 
 be the time of the transit over the meridian of the instru- 
 ment, and should be equal to the right' ascension of the 
 star. If the two results are not equal their difference 
 shows the angle which the plane of the instrument makes 
 with the true prime vertical. 
 
 In working these observations we may use either a 
 sidereal or a mean time chronometer, in the latter case 
 making the usual reductions, and always allowing for the 
 rate. If two transit telescopes are available, one of 
 them may be set up in the plane of the meridian for the 
 purpose of ascertaining the exact chronometer or watch 
 error by star transits. A large transit theodolite serves 
 . instead of two transit instruments, and in this case an 
 ordinary good mean time watch will suffice, the mean time 
 of the observations being reduced to sidereal time. If 
 both the east and the west transits tre observed the dif- 
 ference of time in sidereal units is double the hour angle 
 P, and the latter may therefore be obtained without any 
 reference to the actual watch error, provided the rate is 
 known. It should also be noted that if we reverse the 
 telescope on its supports any error of collimation or ine- 
 quality of pivots will produce exactly contrary effects on 
 the determination of the latitude. Two stars may be 
 observed with the telescope in reversed positions on the 
 same day, or the same star on two successive days, and 
 the mean of the two resulting latitudes taken. 
 
 It will be found advisable to calculate beforehand the 
 altitudes and times of transit (either mean or sidereal, as 
 the case may be) of a number of suitable stars. 
 
 If the plane of the telescope is not in the prime vertical 
 the calculated latitude^ will be too great. Suppose the 
 deviation to be to the ea^st of north and that the tele- 
 
Prime Vertical Transits 
 
 cope describes a vertical circle 
 passing through fb^E > ZWi. 
 Then V Z\ which bisects 
 S S', will be the calculated 
 co-latitude. The correction 
 for the deviation may be 
 computed thus. The star's 
 
 R. A., minus the mean of the p- - 
 
 ^me^of transit corrected for clock error, wiH be thetngle 
 JlL'e : ' "^ *'' "^ht-angled triangle Z P I, 
 
 tan PZ cos ZPZ' = tan PZ' = tan FS cos SPZ' 
 
 or tan<P= -^^^osZPZ' 
 cos"SPZi 
 
 te^to If •'''^f' '' ,"■' '"""= '°' ^" ='"^' -<i " i= bet- 
 er to obtain ,ls value from a star which culminate, 
 
 several degrees south of the zenith, since the same error 
 
 m the observations wi 1 have less effort „„„„ .1, I 
 
 lated azimuth. "P°" ""^ <==^'="- 
 
 exactlv'the'T'' '"'™™ '.'"= ^''■''='" -'■■« "e "Ot all 
 exactly the same a correction has to be applied. For 
 details on this point vide Chauvenet. 
 
 In the field the instrument is generallv mounted on a 
 
 ate the effects of vibration produced by the observer's 
 movements the ends of the legs may be made to res, ;„ 
 no ches ,n flat blocks of wood placed at the bottom of 
 
 .wile .""d ''""''"' ^''"'"'''^'■'"" '-•>- deep a.°d 
 nvo feet in diameter, n,:, ,„,, t^, |^„ P f^ 
 
 fZw T"'T^""""'-' *^""=>- b^'-^'^" 'he Lake of 
 the Weeds and the Kocty Ilountains. 
 
 The meridian mark snould, if possible, be at least half 
 a mile distant. ... black or white vertical stripeTa ntet 
 on a stone serves tor the day time. A, night a'buIlTe;t 
 
76 
 
 The Personal Equation. 
 
 lantern may bo used, the glass being covered by a piece of 
 tin with a vertical slit cut in it. Or, as the lantern is 
 liable to be blown out by the wind, it may be enclosed in 
 a wooden box with a vertical slit. 
 
 The larger transit theodolites may be used as transit 
 instruments, and have the advantage over them that when 
 the meridian line has been ascertained the prime vertical 
 can be at once set off. 
 
 THE PERSONAL EQUATION. 
 
 It often happens that two persons, equally well trained 
 in taking observations, will differ by a considerable and 
 nearly constant quantity in estimating the precise instant 
 of an event, such as the transit of a star across a wire. 
 This difference is called their personal equaiion, and an 
 allowance should always be made for it when observations 
 made by two individuals have to be combined. In the 
 case of the transit instrument this equation may be de- 
 termined as follows: Let one observer note the passage 
 of a star over the first three wires and the other observer 
 note the transits over the remaining wires. If the two 
 observers' estimation of the instant of transit differ, it is 
 evident that (provided the wires are equidistant) the 
 difference will appear on comparing the intervals of time. 
 For instance, if A notes the transits across the first three 
 wires at los., 20s., and 30s., and B notes the remaining 
 two at 39S.5 and 49S.5, it is plain that A would consider 
 the star to be on any wire half a second later than B 
 would, and their personal equation is therefore os.5. By 
 repeating the same process on other stars, and taking the 
 mean of the result, a more accurate estimate is obtained. 
 The personal equation has been found liable to vary with 
 the state of health of the individual. 
 
 The difference in the estimated instant of a transit is 
 only a particular case of the personal equation. 
 
CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 THE ZENITH TELESCOPE. 
 
 The zenith telescope is a contrivance for the exact d. 
 termination of the latitude by measurinc^wf/h7h 
 minuteness the differences or^tr^-T ' ^'^^*^'* 
 
 tancesoftwostars one of f ' ^ "^ "" ^'"^'^ ^^^^ 
 
 the zenith distance of the equator, we have, 
 and adding, 2^= J+i^IjI7Z/ 
 
 thett;:::7fi::L^;^Lrra„T;''^r -. ^-^ 
 
 ing thei.. actual values/ Mo Lt, if /anT::! '""T 
 
 :nr;eir---7;i--— ^ 
 
 r>f*u t .■ ^ '"^° account the difference 
 
 of the refractions at the two altitudes. 
 
 fnrln '"^[[""^^'^t is practically a telescope about 45 inches 
 foca length attached to a vertical a^s round whi^h 
 revolves, having been first clamped at a certain ang e o 
 
 li' 
 
1 
 
 ^«*te:*„j,*v,«L 
 
 '■ i 
 
 .1 i 
 
 78 
 
 The Zenith Telescope. 
 
 elevation. The latitude must be known approximately, 
 and a pair of stars selected which are of so nearly the 
 same meridian zenith distance at that latitude that they 
 will both pass within the field of view of the telescope 
 without our having to alter its angle of elevation. As a 
 rule, z and z must not differ by more than 50' at the most. 
 If the axis is truly vertical and the telescope remains at 
 the same vertical angle at the observation of both stars, 
 then it is plain that the difference of z and z may be read 
 by a micrometer in the eye piece. 
 
 It is usual to observe only stars which pass within 25 
 degrees of the zenith. The telescope has a long diagonal 
 eye piece with a micrometer in its focus, and the micro- 
 meter wire is at right angles to the meridian, ^^here is a 
 very delicate level attached to the telescope, and a vertical 
 arc which serves as a finder. By reading this level at 
 each observation we can detect and allow for any change 
 in the angle of elevation of the telescope. 
 
 The above is the merest outline of the principle 
 of the instrument, and reference must be made to 
 other works for the details of its construction. The 
 method of using it is this: The latitude being already 
 approximately known, a pair of stars is found from a star 
 catalogue, both of which will pass within the field of view 
 without altering the elevation, and which have nearly the 
 same right ascension. The reason for this is that their 
 transit may take place within so short an interval of time 
 that the state of the instrument may remain unchanged ; 
 but a sufficient interval must be allowed for reading the 
 micrometer and level and reversing in azimuth ; say, not 
 less than one minute or more than twenty. The meridian 
 line must have been previously ascertained by transits of 
 known stars, or otherwise, and the chronometer time 
 calculated at which each of the stars will culminate. The 
 telescope having been brought into the meridian, ready 
 for the star which culminates first, and set for the mean 
 
The Zentt: 
 
 Celescope 
 
 79 
 
 wire at the calculated instant ofTt.anl H ™"°'"^'f 
 
 manner If'aftj^h , ' ''"=°"'' ^'^^ '" ">= ==>"<= 
 
 must 1; r LI ed b/r: ""• "° '^^^' '' ■""=•■ °"'. " 
 
 teleLope'^'' ^'^ ^""-""^^"^ ^^ --"^^^ '^^ the transit 
 
 This method of finding the latitude is known as Tal 
 cotts having been invented by Captain Takott oHhe' 
 U. S Engineers. Its defects are that it is often difficuk 
 to obta.n a sufficient number of suitable pairs o? stlVs o 
 which the dechnations are accuratelv known As a -X 
 we have to use the smaller stars, whose FJ;cef are not 
 very well known, and must therefore observe alarge num 
 her of pairs to eliminate errors. 
 
 TO FIND THE CORRECTED LATITUDE 
 
 ern^tr 'f *t ""'T''" ""''^^"^ ^'^ ^^^^ ^^ ^he south- 
 ern star, m, the same for any point in the field assumed as 
 
 he micrometer zero, and .„ the apparent zenith distance 
 
 represented by m„ when the level reaSingis.ero. Suppose 
 
 also, that the micrometer readings increase as the zen th 
 
 distances decrease. Then, if the level reading were ze 1 
 
 the star's apparent zenith distance would be 
 
8o 
 
 The Zenith Telescope. 
 
 Let / be the equivalent in arc of the level readinK, posi- 
 tiwi when the reading of the north end of the level is the 
 greater. Lot r be the refraction. Then the true zenith 
 distance of the southern star, or z, is: 
 
 The quantity r„ +w„ is constant so long as the relation 
 of the level and telescope is not changed. We have, there- 
 fore, for the northern star, 
 
 Hence 
 
 3—z'—m'—m-\-l'-\-l-\^r—r' 
 and the equation for the latitude previously given will 
 become : 
 
 X=^ (^+5') + i (m'-m) + i {l'tl) + ^ {r-r') 
 
 TO FIND Ti'E CORRECTION FOR LEVEL. 
 
 Calling the readings of the north and south ends of the 
 bubble n ana s, and the inchnations at the observations of 
 the north and so-th stars, expressed in divisions of the 
 level, L' and L, we shall have 
 
 V- 
 
 n—s 
 
 L= 
 
 n- 
 
 2 2 
 
 and if D is the value of a division of the level in seconds 
 of arc, we have 
 
 l'=U D /=L D 
 
 and the correction for the level will be 
 
 i (/'+0=i (L'+L) D=''^-Jl±A D 
 
 4 
 
 TO FIND THE VALUE OF A DIVISION OF THE LEVEL. 
 
 Turn the telescope on a well-defined distant mark. 
 Set the level to an extreme reading L, bisect it by the 
 micrometer wire, and let the micrometer reading be M 
 Now move the telescope and level together by the tangent 
 
 \ 
 
The^enith Telescope . g 
 
 screw till the bubble mves s^^A\^^' T" " — 
 
 treme, bisect the mark LJn k 1 "^•^'- the other ex- 
 
 'nicrometer reading bM?THf ^ ""^ "' ''' *^^ 
 the level in turns of th! n!'" "^^"^ "^ ^ ^'^^^''^n of 
 
 lurns ot the micrometer will be 
 
 ^nd if R is the value in st^t of arc of . , r 
 
 of the micrometer th*. vai» r. r , •*,^^ "^ '^ volution 
 arc will be ' "'"' ^ °^ *^« ^^^^1 ^n seconds of 
 
 TO FIND Till 
 
 D=Rrf 
 
 ^emth distance by the formulce ' ^"^''" ^"'^ 
 
 cos ^-=cot <J tan >} 
 
 cos r=cosec «J sin /I 
 Whence, knowin/' the star'Q P a „ ^ .l . 
 error, .e find the chronome i ta. rf^h ^'■-"O'""- 
 Ration. Set the telescope for he^nhh ir"''''/'""- 
 it upon the star ,n „r ,„ • '""/'=""" distance », direct 
 
 «. elcngatio; 7. . rcrr^Ith':^ "'^ ""'"f «-'• 
 note the time if bisec^.^ "^'"""eter wire; 
 
 .■n.s. A3 the :Lr » ^es ; ^Irrea^ -' -^' -ad- 
 often as possible while it i"" LLTh "!'= ?™«= as 
 
 tU\:;:.t:.t^\"--™"-'.wroTbist^^^^ 
 
 1 > 
 
 3> 
 
 s> 
 
 o , --- ""'"-o ui uisec- 
 
 readin,s, „ "the micromete'r Te'^Lrf,! '"•'■"°'""'=' 
 greatest elongation (,). and T 7 ^f <he -nstant of 
 
 an..ardistances;the;the,at;rtre'?;ntSir^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 sinz,=sin(^— <j)cos^ 
 smf3=sin (f— /!,)cos5 
 
 ™"roLtr'''rd1f":Le'V;erha:'r''^ ^T'"""™ °' '"« 
 
 w. since (.-., , irjii-r :rr.:: 
 
 X 
 

 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 // 
 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 
 Hi p 28 
 
 tii 
 us 
 
 u 
 
 I—. 
 
 2.2 
 2.0 
 
 
 V 
 
 'Z 
 
 
 ^^v 
 
 '> 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 Wk:.>i MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 m 
 
 \ 
 
 
 f 
 
 ^\ 
 
 ^v 
 
 V 
 
 
 
? 
 
 ,^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 (/. 
 
82 
 
 The Zenith Telescope. 
 
 screw to move the thread through the angular distance ij 
 
 {m — ;»i) R=i\ 
 Also (m — >Ha) R=«3 
 Therefore, subtracting 
 
 (Wa — Wi) R = /i — jj 
 
 or R:r= 
 
 Wj 
 
 -;m, 
 
 To correct for any change in the level reading, let l^ 
 and /a be the level readings corresponding to m^ and ;«,; 
 then (/g — /j) D is the change required. The angular value 
 of D is unknown ; but, since D = (^/K, the correction to be 
 applied to (/j — i^) is {/g — /j) dR; and 
 
 (Wa — Wi) R=ti — ij, ± (/^ — /,) dR 
 
 or R=^ 
 
 U-H 
 
 A value of R is thus obtained for each of the observa- 
 tions, and the mean of the results taken. This mean has 
 then to be corrected for refraction, thus : From the tables 
 find the change in refraction for i' at the i-enith distance 
 z. Let this change be dr ; then R dr will be the correc- 
 tion to be subtracted from R. 
 
 REDUCTION TO THE MERIDIAN. 
 
 If a star has not been observed exactly on the meri- 
 dian it may be taken when off it, and the observation re- 
 duced. The following is one method of doing this. Keep- 
 ing the instrument clamped in the meridian, the star is 
 observed at a certain distance from the middle vertical 
 thread and the time noted. This will give its hour angle, 
 and if we denote this by t (in seconds of time) the reduc- 
 tion is obtained by the formula 
 
 ^ (15 ty sin x"sin 2d 
 
 This is to be added to the observed zenith distance of a 
 southern star, or subtracted from that of a northern one, 
 and, in either case, half of it is to be added to the latitude. 
 
 
The Zenith Telescope. 
 
 REFRACTION. 
 
 83 
 
 When the .en'th distances are small the refraction 
 vanes as the tangent of the zenith distance. 
 
 Let r=a tan z 
 r'=ci tan z' 
 Then r~r'=a (tan s— tan z) 
 
 __ sm (2 — z') 
 cos z cos s' 
 
 =(^-^y') " sin i' 
 ^^ ''^ cos* 3' "^^'■^y 
 
 a may be taken as 57".;, and the difference of th^ 
 micrometer readings used for (z~z') ^ 
 
 THE PORTABLE TRANSIT INSTRUMENT AS A 7ENITH 
 TELESCOPE. 
 
 adL'^'n T'^'l" uT' ''^'^^^"P^ ^'-^ - micromete^ 
 added to It, and the level of the finder rim]. ;.- ^ 
 
 sufficiently delicate, it may be used a^ a L " f te :scZe' 
 reversing the mstrument in its Ys between the oS^: 
 
 Th^'^!7'^^' ?^''^'"^"^^ give the mean places of the stars 
 The «/^«..;., places are those which have to be used and 
 must therefore be determined. ' ^ 
 
 
wliiilliHlili II 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 ADDITIONAL METHODS OF FINDING THE LATITUDE. 
 
 TO FIND THE LATITUDE BY A SINGLE ALTITUDE TAKEN 
 AT A KNOWN TIME. 
 
 Here we have in the triangle P Z S the hour 
 angle P, the side Z S (90°— the objects alti- 
 tude), and P S the polar distance. From these 
 data we have to find P Z. From S draw S M 
 perpendicular to P Z produced. Let cJ be the 
 declination, (p the latitude, and a the altitude. 
 In the triangle P M S we have : 
 
 cos P=tan P M cot P S=tan P M tan d 
 M Z=P M— P Z=P M + y>~9o° 
 
 Also 'A^- . 
 
 cos PM : cosZ M::cos P S : cosZS 
 or cos P M : sin (P M+^)::sin <5 : sin a 
 
 Therefore 
 
 sin (P M+^)= 
 
 sin ojcos P M 
 sin d 
 
 (2) 
 
 Equation (i) gives P M and (2) gives P M + ^ 
 In this method, if the star is observed when far from the 
 meridian a small error in the hour angle produces a large 
 error in the computed value of the latitude. The altitude 
 should therefore be taken when the object is near the meri- 
 dian. 
 
 
TDE. 
 "AKEN 
 
 tl the 
 large 
 itude 
 neri- 
 
 
 Lalitude by Altitude of Pole Star. 
 
 85 
 
 TO FIND THE LATITUDE BV OBSERVATIONS OF ThT^ 
 STAR OUT OF THE MERIDIAN. 
 
 Up be the polar distance of the pole star 
 m circular measure p'^ h a very small 
 quantity. 
 
 Let P be the pole, Z the zenith, and S 
 the star at an hour anp^le h or SPZ. Draw 
 ^ N at right angles to P Z and take ZU 
 equal to Z S. Let P N be denoted by .r. 
 
 MNby3..SPby;^, the star's altitude by 
 a, and the latitude by /". Then 
 
 P Z=Z M + M P=Z S + P N-N M '''' '' 
 or go~l=go—a+x~y 
 .'. l=a — x+y 
 We have to find .v and y. 
 
 (1) From the right-angled triangle S P N we have 
 
 cos S P N=tan P N cot P S 
 .'. tan .v-=tan p cos h 
 or, approximately, .-v =p cos A 
 
 (2) Denoting S N by , we have from the same triangle 
 
 Sin S N=sin S P sin S P N 
 
 or sin 7=sin p sin h 
 
 .'. approximately, q=p sin h. 
 
 (3) In the right-angled triangle S N Z we have 
 
 cos Z S=cos S N cos Z N 
 .'. sin fl=cos q sin (a+y) 
 
 or sin (a+y)= ^^'^^ 
 or approximately 
 
 sin a+|^tcosa=- 
 
 : 
 
 COS^ 
 
 sm a 
 
 =sin a (i-l-^ qi) 
 
 y cos a=^ q9 sin a 
 orj'=J<7» tan a 
 
 =i>» sin* /{tan a 
 
MMi 
 
 ! 
 i 
 
 f 
 
 86 
 
 Circum-Meridian A ItiUides. 
 
 Hence, in circular measnre 
 
 l=-a—p cos h-^^ p^ sin'* h tan a 
 or in sexag-esimal measure 
 
 l=a~p cos h + ^ />» sin i " sin^ h tan a 
 
 This is the method given in the explanations at the end 
 of the Nautical Almanac. To find the latitude we have 
 only to take an altitude of Polaris, note the time (which 
 will give us the sidereal time), and apply certain correc- 
 tions as directed in the Almanac. 
 
 FINDING THE LATITUDE BY CIRCUM-MERIDIAN ALTITUDES. 
 
 When the latitude has been found by a single meridian 
 altitude the result is only approximately true. It may, 
 however, be obtained with great exactness by taking a 
 number of altitudes of the sun or a star when within about 
 a quarter of an hour of the meridian on either side of it. 
 The altitudes may be taken with the sextant, reflecting 
 circle, or theodolite, and the observations should follow 
 ea-h other quickly, and at about equal intervals of time. 
 
 The watch error must be exactly known, and the time 
 of each altitude noted. The mean of the altitudes is 
 taken, but the hour angle for each must be obtained 
 separately. In the case of the sun this is done by cor- 
 recting the observed times for watch error and subtracting 
 them from the mean time of apparent noon. If a star is 
 used the mean time corresponding to its R. A. will, of 
 course, give the hour angles— 
 
 The formula is 
 
 Latitude=go* — a±d — x' 
 Where a is the mean of the altitudes, d the declination 
 of the object (negative if south), and x" a quantity equal to 
 
 • • ^» 
 2 sin' — 
 
 2 
 
 sin J. X cos. approx. lat. x cos. dec'n. x sec. alt. ; h being 
 the hour angle. 
 
Circiim-Meyidian A ltitude%. 
 
 ^_ 87 
 
 To prove the formula 
 
 2 sin» — 
 and .r"= ^ v ^°^ ^ ^°s ^ 
 
 • //A 
 
 Sin I cos a 
 
 Let P be the pole, Z the zenith, and S the 
 sun or star near the meridian. 
 
 Let a be the star's altitude, h its hour anirle 
 and d its declination. 
 
 Let a + x be the star's meridian altitude. 
 Then a+x-=^d=Cio—l 
 
 We have now to determine the small quantity .v ^^ 
 Now, sin PZ sin PS cos ZPS^cos ZS-cos v'z< ^^■ 
 
 ^^^^ or cos I cos d cos A=sin «-sin / sin d ' "' 
 
 .: cos I cos d (i-cos h) -= -sin a + cos (l-d) 
 
 = — sina-fsin(a + ;v) 
 
 .*. 2 cos / cos d sin* - - 
 2 
 
 Therefore, approximately 
 
 -2 sin -^ cos (a + ^) 
 
 2 smj — 
 
 X"= ?_ V ^°S ^ cos i 
 
 sin I cos a 
 
 d is, of course, negative if south 
 
 2 sin«~ 
 The value of the expression __^'" 2 .. 
 
 sml"~ (^"own as the 
 
 "reduction to the meridian") is found for each hour 
 t7cire :.^:^ -' ''' -- -^" ^^e vai::^ tatn 
 
 the mean of ten altitudes of the sun's lower l!mb oh' 
 served w.th a powerful theodolite, was ,,■ 59 ao' Tht," 
 
:^- 
 
 -^■^■nn 
 
 88 
 
 Circum-Meridian A Ititudes. 
 
 \) 
 
 t 
 
 when corrected for refraction, parallax, and semi-diameter 
 gave 40° 14' 3i".55 as the true mean altitude of the sun's 
 centre. The sun's declination was 19° 53' 45".8 south 
 The mean of the values of the reduction for the observed 
 hour angles, as taken from the table, was i6".26, and the 
 calculated value of x was I7".36. 
 
 go o o 
 ^•t'tude 40 14 31.5 5 -o 
 
 ^ ,.■ . 49 45 28.45 
 Decimation... 19 53 45,80 ^_ 
 
 29 51 42.65 
 1^36 '^ 
 
 Latitude=29 51 25.29 
 Strictly speaking, a further correction ought to be made 
 for the change in the sun's declination during the obser- 
 vations. 
 
 In the case of a star we must add 0.0023715 to the log 
 oix" to correct the hour angle for the difference between 
 the sidereal and mean time intervals; for the star moves 
 faster than the sun, and therefore gives a larger hour 
 angle for the same time. 
 
 Additional accuracy is obtained by taking half the ob- 
 servations east of the meridian, and half west of it, the 
 intervalsof time between the successive observations being 
 made as nearly equal as possible. The hour angle 
 changes its sign after the meridian passage of the object. 
 
 
 I w 
 
-diameter, 
 the sun's 
 ".8 south, 
 i observed 
 3, and the 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 > be made 
 le obser- 
 
 » the log. 
 between 
 ir moves 
 ?er hour 
 
 the ob- 
 ' it, the 
 ns being 
 r angle 
 object. 
 
 t^TERPOLATlON. 
 ''^^^^ODS OF FINDim THE LONGITUDE. 
 
 and longitude of tre place 'fo7'' '°'" '^^ ^°^^^ ^'-e 
 given are for GreemvS"me. "''""' ^^"^^ *^^ ^^^- 
 
 accurate result. "^^ "^"^ *° obtain a very 
 
 su':s:s:::~:;::;^^v^thg.^^ 
 
 ^ -ain .ear, at a ^t:\Z^!: ^ :fJr:::^ Of 
 For Greenwich mean noon we find in the Almanac 
 
 Date c > J 
 
 '^ow, at apparent noon at the ohr^ :, -ii v 
 apparent time at Greenw.VI, VPf^ " "'" be 4 p.m. 
 
 ^;-ree„..a.t.:r!;:;--:--;-rr 
 
 Th.s va„at,on is X3-.305, which n,„„ip„-ed by I X^ 
 
90 
 
 Intcipohition, 
 
 53".22 to bo subtracted from the dc- 
 dination of 2d January — 
 22' 57' lC".2 
 .^3".22 
 
 22 56 22,98=required dec'n. 
 
 IJ.2I 
 
 12) 1. 14 
 
 •095 
 13.21 
 
 TO one =^ V«rl»tlnn 
 ^J •305 It a I'M 
 
 53-22 
 
 il V -3 
 
 INTERPOLATION BY SECOND DIFFERENCES. 
 
 The differences between the successive values of the 
 quantities fjiven in the Nautical Ahnanac as functions of 
 the time are called the first differences ; the differences be- 
 tween these successive differences are called second 
 differences; the differences of the second differences are 
 third differences, and so on. In simple interpolation we 
 assume the function to vary uniformly ; that is, that the 
 first difference is constant, and therefore that there is no 
 second difference. If this is not the case simple interpo- 
 lation will give an incorrect result, and we must resort to 
 interpolation by second differences, in which we take into 
 account the variation in the first difference, but assume 
 its variation to be constant and that there is no third 
 difference. 
 
 The formula employed is 
 
 f{a + k)=f{a) + Mi + \5k''- 
 
 where A is half the sum of two consecutive first differ- 
 ences and B is half their difference. It is thus derived: 
 
 We have by Taylor's Theorem 
 
 / (.V + /;)=/ (.v) + Ml + hh 2 + &c . (A) 
 
 and if /t is small compared with .v ilie successive terms of 
 the series grow rapidly less. 
 
VarUtlnn 
 at i r.M 
 
 (A) 
 
 Interpolation. m 
 
 Suppose a— I, 11, and </-f-i to be three successive ar^'u- 
 ments of a tal)le constructed from/(.v) in which it is as- 
 surDed that a is many times greater than i. Then, from 
 the table we knowy fa-i),/(a), and/(a + i), and there- 
 fore we knowthc(nfferences/(rt)-/0,— I), ,un] /0» + i)— 
 An), which we may (lesi<,Miate by A and A' respectively. 
 Knowin{( that third (hffercnces can be nc/-Iected we can 
 obtain tlie vahie of/ (a + k), where k is less than i, as 
 follows: 
 
 From (A) we have, if we nef,dect hij^her powers 
 /(a— i)=/(rt)_A + B (I) 
 
 / («)=/ (a) (2) 
 
 /(« + i)=/(a)+A + B (3) 
 
 /{a-i-k)=/{a)+Ak+Bk^ (4) 
 
 Subtracting equation (i) from (2) we get 
 
 A=A— B 
 and subtracting (2) from (3) A'=A + B 
 
 .-. A = i (A'+A) 
 
 B = |(A'-A) 
 /. substituting in (4) 
 
 / {a + k)=/{a) + ^ (A'+ A)/c + i (A'— A) k^ 
 
 The signs of A and B must be carefully noted. If the 
 functions are decreasing the first differences are negative, 
 and if the first differences are decre- mg the second differ- 
 ences are negative. 
 
 The method can be better understood from an example 
 or two. 
 
 Ex. i.-Given Hie logs, of 365, 366, and 367 to 7 places 
 of decmials to determine log. 366.4. 
 
 Numbers. 
 
 365 
 366 
 
 3^7 
 
 Lor/. 
 
 IM Differ'ce. 
 
 SdDlffer'ce. 
 
 5622929 
 
 56348II "f2 
 
 5646661 "850 
 
 —32 
 
9» 
 
 Interpolation. 
 
 Here k is ,<o, /I =11866, and li = ~ib. 
 
 5634811 ii«66+A 
 
 4746 A 
 
 3639557 
 3 
 
 47464 
 -»j^x(A)»=-3, nearly. 
 
 3639554 
 The tables give the log. as 3639555, 
 
 If the second difference had been neglected—/.^, if wc 
 had worked by simple interpolation, the result vvoulil have 
 been 5639551. 
 
 Ex. 2.-Given the log. cosines of 89° 32', 89' ^5, and 
 89 34. to find log. COS. 8g' :i^' 15". 
 
 M DifferenceJjml Difference. 
 
 Log. COS. 89 32=7.9108793 I 
 
 Log. COS. 89 33=7.8950854! -;57939 _ . 
 
 Log. COS. 89 34 = 7-8786953 —163901 5902 
 
 Here we have to subtract Uxhalf the sum of the ist 
 differences, and a^)«xhair the second difference or 
 40416 in all ; ' 
 
 .'.log. cos. 890 33 '15" =7-89 10438. 
 
 TO FIND THE GREENWICH TIME CORRESPONDING TO A 
 GIVEN RIGHT ASCENSION OF THE MOON ON A GIVEN DAY. 
 
 Let T'=the Greenwich time corresponding to the given 
 right ascension a' 
 
 T=the Greenwich hi.ur preceding T' and correspond- 
 ing to the right ascension a 
 
 A a=the difference of R. A. in one minute at the 
 time T. 
 
 Then we shall have, approximately, 
 
 a —a 
 
 T— T = 
 
 r 
 
 A « 
 
Interpolation. ^^ 
 
 To r...Tcct for secnci differences we have now only to 
 fi.u the ,hf crenr.. „f R. A. for one minute at the nufhlle 
 nstant of the .nterval T-T. Call this a', and we shall 
 nave 
 
 -p, 'p « — a 
 
 T and T are in minutes. 
 
 INTKUPOLATION HV DIFFERKNCKS OF ANY OKDKK. 
 
 If it is required to find the intermediate values of a 
 unct.on w.th ^neater exactness than can be done by 
 M terpo at.on by second chfferences we can use any nun. 
 Der ol differences. 
 
 ^f* I' J"^!',' '^+^ ^' &^" ''« the arguments. 
 ^. P', F , &c., " the functions. 
 
 «. «, a" &c., 
 " b, b' b" &c., 
 &c., 
 
 So that F>~F=a, 
 
 the 1st differences. 
 " and 
 &c., 
 
 a' ~a=b, and so on. 
 
 Nmv, if FCO is the function corresponding to the argu- 
 nient I +n w we have 
 
 F(«'^F + «a+ "P^II^b+'K»-j) (n~2) ^^ , , 
 
 u -r \-8cc. (a) 
 
 1.2 
 
 1.2.3 
 
 • If « be taken successively equal to 0,1.2, &c., we shall 
 
 obtam the functions F, F', F" &r nnH ;J a- . 
 , , i , r , (xc, and mtermediate 
 
 values are found by usmg fractional values of;/. To find 
 the proper value of n in each case let T-f^ denote the 
 va ue of the argument for which we wish to interpolate a 
 value of the function ; then 
 
 n w=t, and n= t ; that is, n is the value of / reduced 
 to a fraction of the interval w. 
 
 Ex.-Suppose the moon's R. A. had been given in the 
 Almanac for every 12th hour, as follows : 
 
 W 
 

 ■ I 
 
 1 1 
 
 94 
 
 Mar. 5, oh 
 
 Muoit's R. A. 
 
 Interpolation . 
 
 i^TDiff^^ 2nd Dijf. 3rf niff, ^thDiff\5thDif 
 
 «»ai.i. on2in. 5Sni2Ss .30I „ 
 
 " 5. 12h|22 27 15 .4i +28D1- 47S.O4 
 
 fM2h23 23 3 .39 27 37.89 32.18 6.53 + IS .74 
 
 " 7, oh 23 50 15 .03 27 12 .24 ^5 .05 ^ 53 j J ^g 
 
 " 7, I2h o 17 9 .8J 26 54 .20 ' i« oa 7 
 
 — OS.66 
 
 required the moon's R. A. for March 5, 6h. 
 
 Kere T=March 5, o^, t^C^., u>=x2\ n:=^\.=L. ^,,. 
 .f we denote the co-efficients of ., ,, ., &e. in^« Lv A 
 i5, L, &c., we have - ' 
 
 „=+,8". 47..04, A^„ ,, F=^" 58" a8..39 
 
 b=~ 
 
 4.79, C=B ^ =+^.^, c'c^-.-+ 
 
 ip.74> D^C ' 
 
 M— 3 
 
 .r= 6 
 
 — tItt, D^=<=— 
 
 
 4^62 
 
 o«.3o 
 o».o7 
 
 Og.02 
 
 Moon's R.A. on March 5, 6^ or F^^^ =22» 12-56.74 
 
 TO FIND THE LONGITUDE BY TRANSITS OF MOON- 
 CULMINATING STARS. 
 
 This is a simple and easy way of finding the lon^ritude 
 
 tTLT/''^ ''" '^ '"°^^"' ''^^^^ -^ ^ -y at 
 
 ZT2 ' r '" '''''' °^ °"^ ■'^^^^"^ '" an observed 
 ^ans t may throw the longitude out as much as half a 
 
 mmute m t.me, or 7-i n^inutes in arc. It is, howeve a 
 
 ^^es 11 T' '^""'"' *° ^ ^"'•^^^-' -- ^"'h 
 
 wa'c Of " ' ''■'"''* ^'^^^^^''^^ ^"d -" ordinary 
 prefted'f rS,:.-^^^^^^ ^^^^ ^— is to d 
 
 The instrument is set up in the plane of the meridian, 
 
 ■'--r 
 
I^^^ii^^deby Moon-Culminations. gg 
 
 knew either Greenwich or Ic'tim uHL'TT 1° 
 watch should be taken into' accoT^ 't fn lal J 
 transit are noted, and the interval of ti„,e between t 
 .s reduced from mean to sidereal time! ''™ 
 
 In the Nautical Almanac are given, for everv dav of .(,„ 
 year, the sidereal times of transit a C^TZthllt^ 
 moon and of certain suitable. •,s c-ill,. '•"'"^'^ °f "'<= 
 in-r" ^, I . ''"^'J'e^ ^^s, callei. noon-culniinat- 
 
 ■ng stars ; also the rate of change per hour fat f hT 
 of transit) of the moon's R. A As the m„ 
 rapid^- through the stars from west t Z. TL7ZZ 
 tl.at,a sta.,o„ not en the meridian of Greenw.cl the 
 .nterva, between the two transits will be diffe,e„Tto ,h, 
 at Greenwich; and, the moon's rate of mo.irpeHou 
 being known, a simple proportion will ,if the stat o nl 
 
 longi^,dr"?f M '""°" """ ''"•'■"*''• ""'I 'hence the 
 longitude If the station is far from the meridian of 
 
 Greenwich a correction will have to be made for "he 
 change i„ ,he rate of change of the moon's R A xt 
 rate of change at the time of transit is fonnH f? .f 
 Nautical Almanac by interpolation by ^ c™d iffrncer 
 and the mean o the rates of change at Greenwich and at" 
 he station is taken as the rate for the whole interval o 
 time between the transits. mierval of 
 
 An example will best illustrate the method :- 
 
 At Kingston, Canada, on the 24th Februarv .sx, .1. 
 transits of the star -. Tauri and of'the „ 00 's ti^ iimb 
 were observed at 6h. om. ys., and 6h. rm. gs r sp" 
 vely, mean time. Uifferenee, 46 seconds, „i 46 ,?,, 
 Sidereal units. 4"s.i^ in 
 
1^ 
 
 I 1 
 
 i 
 
 96 
 
 Longitude by Moon-Culminations. 
 
 Greenwich TransitslL^^"""-^^- ^9^. 163.62 
 
 Moon I... 4 7 57 .44 
 
 Difference in sidereal time= 
 Add interval at Kingston^ 
 
 iim. 19S.18 
 46 .12 
 
 Total change of moon's R.A= 12m 53.3=7253.3 
 By interpolation by second differences the variation of 
 the moon's R.A. per hour at Kingston at the time of 
 
 transit was found to be 142s .23 
 
 At Greenwich it was 1^.2 .68 
 
 J 
 
 2)284 -91 
 
 Mean rate of variation 142.455 
 
 1-2:^5 ^^h. = 5h.09i6 
 
 5h. 5m. 293.76 west longitude. 
 It should be noted that in this case the moon was west 
 of the star at transit at Greenwich and east of it at 
 Kingston, having passed it in the interval. 
 
 The following is a specimen of the part of the Nautical 
 Almanac relating to moon-culminating stars. 
 
 n 
 
Mom-Culminating Stars. 
 
 !5s.3 
 tion of 
 ime of 
 
 [itude. 
 
 s west 
 it at 
 
 utical 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 00 
 
 
 U) 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 O 
 
 NH 
 
 
 H 
 
 h 
 
 < 
 
 
 :?; 
 
 h 
 
 V 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 ■V^s„jo-joo 
 
 ■u a 
 « o 
 
 apnjiuSBi^ 
 
 2 N ix 
 
 O CO 
 
 ■*oo 
 <> d 
 
 "> 't- fO 5h 
 
 to to 
 
 i 
 
 _oo'_ 
 
 I-H l-H .^ ^ 
 
 CXI >- 
 
 o c rt 
 
 "3 
 
 FINDING THE LONGITUDE BY^Ti^dISTANCES. 
 
 This method is an important one to the travelh'n^ n 
 
 r ::;r';; ^'^ -^^^^"^^ -^°^^ chJnTmit^r; 
 
 other Ifl^;- " '"^trument used is the sextant or some 
 other reflectmg one, and the observation is a very siZe 
 
 eve; an"erTl'°''^T^''"^ ^^^ angle, causes how! 
 ever, an en or m longitude of about a quarter of a degree 
 
 1 ■ I 
 
98 
 
 Longitude by Lunar Distances. 
 
 The moon moves amongst the stars from west to east 
 at the rate of about 12° a day. Its angular distance from 
 the sun or certain stars may therefore be taken as an in- 
 dication of Greenwich mean time at any instant— the 
 moon being in fact made use of as a clock in the sky to 
 show Greenwich mean time at the instant of observation. 
 The local mean time being also supposed to be known, 
 we have the requisite data for determining the longitude 
 of a station. 
 
 In the Nautical Almanac are given for every 3d hour of 
 G.M.T. the angular distances of the apparent centre of the 
 moon from the sun, the larger planets, and certain stars, 
 as they would appear from the centi of the earth. When 
 a lunar distance has been observed it has to be reduced 
 to the centre of the earth by clearing it of the effects of 
 parallax and refraction, and the numbers in the Nautical 
 Almanac give the exact Greenwich mean time at which 
 the objects would have the same distance. 
 
 It is to be noted that, though the combined effect of 
 parallax and refraction increases the apparent altitude of 
 the sun or a star, in the case of the moon, owing to its near- 
 ness to the earth, the parallax is greater than the refrac- 
 tion, and the altitude is lessened. 
 
 Three observations are required— one of the lunar dis- 
 tance, one of the moon's altitude, and one of the other 
 object's altitude. The altitudes need not be observed 
 with the same care as the distance. The clock time of 
 the observations must also be noted. The sextant is the 
 instrument generally used. All the observations can be taken 
 by one observer, but it is better to have three or four. If 
 one of the objects is at a proper distance from the meri- 
 dian the local mean time can be inferred ."rom its altitude. 
 If it is too near the meridian the \vatch error must be 
 found by an altitude taken either before or after the lunar 
 observation. 
 
I 
 
 Longitude by Lunar Distances. 
 
 99 
 
 written down in their proper order: 
 
 latob?;i>"^^*'.'.r'="- ^'^•.°^«'»'- -'t- Of moon'B lower limb. Dist.ofmoon'B f.rllmb 
 
 ard " 
 4th " 
 
 4) 
 
 Mean 
 
 ToUli. 
 
 If there is only one observeVit is best to take" the ob- 
 servations in the following order, noting the time by a 
 watch, ist. alt of sun, star or planet; ad, alt. of moon; 
 3c., any odd number of distances; 4th, alt. of moon; 5th 
 at of sun star, or planet. Take the mean of the dis! 
 
 ances and of their times. Then reduce the altitudes to 
 the mean of the times; ,.c., form the proportion-differ- 
 ence of times of altitudes : diff. of alts.::diff between 
 t.ine of ist alt. and mean of the times : a fourth number 
 vvaich IS to be added to or subtracted from ist alt ac 
 cc rdmg as it is increasing or diminishing. This will give 
 the altitudes reduced to the mean of tSe times, or Z- 
 responding to that mean. 
 
 The altitudes cf moon and star must be corrected as 
 
 added t"?h.'!"'™"''^ semi-diameter of the moon 
 added to the distance to give the distance of its centre. 
 1 iie lunar distance has then to be cleared of the effects 
 of parallax and refraction. 
 
 TO DETERMINE THE LUNAR DISTANCE CLEARED OF 
 PARALLAX AND REFRACTION. 
 
 Let Z be the observer's zenith, Zm 
 and /,v the vertical circles in which the 
 inocn and star are situated at .he instant 
 of observation. Let m and s be their 
 observed places, U and S their places 
 after correction for parallax and refrac- 
 tion : then Zm, Zs, and ms are found by 
 observation, andZ iM and ZS are obtained 
 by correcting the observations. The ob- Fi. 27 
 
100 
 
 Longitude by Lunar Distan 
 
 ces. 
 
 ject of the calculation is to determine M S. 
 
 Now, as the angle Z is common to the triangles mZs 
 and M Z S, we can find Z from the triangle mZs in which 
 all the sides are known. Next, in triangle MZS there 
 are known M Z, Z S, and the included angle Z, from 
 which M S can be found. M S is the cleared lunar dis- 
 tance. The numerical work of this process is tedious. 
 
 The cleared distance having been obtained we proceed 
 in accordance with the rules given in the N.A. 
 
 The Greenwich mean time corresponding to the cleared 
 distance can be found either by a simple proportion or b}- 
 proportional logs. 
 
 It admits of proof that if D is the moon's semi-diameter 
 as seen from the centre of the earth (given in N.A.), D' 
 its semi-diameter as seen by a spectator in whose ;;enitli 
 it is, D" its semi-diameter as seen at a point where its alti- 
 tude is a, then 
 
 D" — D=(D' — D) sin a, very nearly. 
 
 For details of the methods of finding differences of 
 longitude by the transportation of chronometers, and by 
 the electric telegraph, vide Chauvenet or Loomis. 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XI. 
 
 
 MISICELLANEOUS. 
 
 TO KIND THE AMPLITUDK AND HOUR ANGLH OF A 
 GIVEN HEAVENLV RODY WHEN ON THE HOK,;^ON. 
 
 Tho ampUtHdc is the nn-^Ie that the plane of tl,e 
 vertical c.rcle thron.h an ohject n,al<es Jith the pi 
 of the prime vertical. * 
 
 ane 
 
 Let N SEW he the north, south, 
 '■•'i.'^t, :in(l west points of the hori/on 
 respectively; P the pole ; and H the 
 heavenly body. Suppose H to be 
 hctween N and W. Join P H. 
 
 Here W H is the amplitude {a) 
 
 Fi, .S vn u '^ *'"'^"^'" H P N we have 
 
 , ^. '^^ ^he latitude (<p), H P the object's 
 
 poar distance (90 -Jj, and H N P a right angle. Also, if 
 
 Hence "'^"^ " ^ ^^'^°~'' ^"'^ ^ H^go'-a. 
 
 sin a= sec <p sin 3 
 cos ;:= — tan <p tan S^ 
 
 From the second of these equations we can calculate 
 the tune at which the heavenly body rises and sets. 
 
 i 
 
 'i 
 
102 
 
 Parallax. 
 
 TO FIND THE EQUATORIAL HORIZONTAL PARALLAX OF A 
 HEAVENLY BODY AT A GIVEN DISTANCE FROM THE 
 CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 
 
 Referring to the Hgure in the next article, if A is the 
 observer's position H' will be the apparent position of the 
 heavenly body, and if C be the centre of the earth the 
 equatorial horizontal parallax will be the angle H'. Desig- 
 nating A C by r, A H' or C H by d, and the parallax by />, 
 we have 
 
 sin p = — , 
 a 
 
 TO FIND THE PARALLAX IN ALTITUDE, THE EARTH BEING 
 REGARDEI'^ AS A SPHERE. 
 
 In Fig. 2g A is the observ- 
 er's position, Z the zenith, 
 C H the rational horizon. 
 A H' the sensible horizon, and 
 S the heavenly body. Let p 
 be the horizontal parallax 
 (H'), p' the parallax in altitude 
 (S), h the altitude (S A H'), 
 and d the distance of the /,,„ .,, 
 
 heavenly body (S C). From the trian ,de S A C we have 
 !i" ^__ — _ s'" S _ A C 
 sin Z A S ~ sin S A'"C~ S^ 
 
 = —7- = sin 6 
 
 a ^ 
 
 or sin/)' = cos // sin p 
 The angles/) and p' being (except in the case of the 
 moon) very small, we may substitute them for their sines, 
 and the equation becomes 
 
 p'=p cos h 
 
 STAR CATALOGUES. 
 
 If we want to find the position of a star not included 
 amongst the small number (197) given in the Nautical 
 Almanac we must refer to a star catalogue. In these 
 
 J 
 
 
J 
 
 Star Catalaf;ues. 
 
 103 
 
 catalogues the stars are arranj^^ed in the order of their 
 right ascensions, with the <hita for fin.ling their apparent 
 right ascensions and declinations at any given date These 
 co-ordinates are always changing, ist. by precession, nuta- 
 tion, and aberration, which cause onlv apparent changes of 
 position ; 2ndly, by the proper .notions of the stars them- 
 selves amongst each other. In the catalogues the stars 
 are referred to a mean equator and a mean equinox at 
 some assumed epoch. The place of a star so referred is 
 called Its mean place at that time; that of a star referred 
 to the true equator and true equinox its Irne place; and 
 that m which the star appears to the observer in motion 
 Its apparent place. The mean place at any time can be 
 found from that of the catalogue by applying the 
 precession and the proper motion for the time that has 
 elapsed since the epoch of the catalogue; the true place will 
 then be found by correcting the mean place for nutation • 
 and, lastly the apparent place is found by correcting the 
 true place for aberraticn. 
 
 The most noteworthy star catalogues are the British 
 Assoaation Catalogue (B. A. C.) containing 8,^77 stars, 
 the Greenwich catalogues, Lalande's, containing nearW 
 50,000, Struve's, Argelander's, &c., &c. 
 
 DIFFERENTIAL VARIATIONS OF CO-ORDINATES. 
 
 It is often necessary in practical astronomy to deter- 
 mine what effect given variations of the data will produce 
 m the quantities computed from them. If the variations 
 are very small the simpler differential equations may be 
 used. The most useful differential formula, as regards 
 spherical triangles, are deduced as follows : 
 
 We have the fundamental equations: 
 cos a = cos b cos c + sin b sin c cos A 
 sm a cos B = cos 6 sin c-sin b cos c cos A 1 
 sin a sin B = sin 6 sin A ( \ 
 
 smacosC = sin6cosc-cos6sinccosAl' 
 sin a sin C=sm c sin A I 
 
 I 
 
104 
 
 Differential Variations. 
 
 Differentiating: the first equatici of this ^aouirand 
 charijing signs, we have ^ 
 
 sin a da=sm b cos c db + co. b sin . rfc-cos b sin . cos A .//. 
 ^ —sin b cos c cos A ^/c-f sin /; sin c sin A c/ A 
 -(sin b cos c— cos6 sin c cos A) (/6 + 
 
 (cos b sin .-sin 6 cos c cos A) .^c + sin /. sin c sin A </ A 
 =sin a cos C rf6 + sin a cos B ./c-fsin 6 sin c sin A ./« 
 or rffl=cos C rf^ + cos B rfc + sin b sin c'!" ^,/ A 
 =cos C rf/; + cos B dc+m^ b sin C d A ^'" " 
 
 Similarly we obtain 
 
 ~nn! ^ Z^+^^^-^o/ A ^c = sin c sin A d P, ' (2) 
 
 -cos B rffl-cos A db+dc^sin a sin B d C j 
 
 From these, by eliminating da, we obtain : 
 sm C db~cos a sin B rfc=sin b m'i r ^ \ , ■ 
 -cousin CV.+s,;„ B ..JsTnlTos B ^;J::;L' H^i^ 
 
 and by eliminating rf6 from these : 
 
 «'"«sinBrfc^cosWA+cos«./B + c^C (4) 
 If we eliminate d A from (3) we get 
 
 cos 6 sin C i6-cos c sin B ^c^sin c cos B d B 
 
 —sin 6 cos C ^ C 
 and, by dividing this equation by sin b sin C or its 
 
 equivalent sin c sin B, we have 
 cot 6 db-cot c dc^cot B rf B-cot Cde (5) 
 
 and put" '''"^''' '^^" '^" -^tronomical triangle P Z S. 
 A «-Z fl=9o°— ^ 
 
 ^ =9 c=go° — ^ 
 
 Then the first equations of (2) and (3) give 
 
 which determme the errors i ^ and rf ^ in the values of ^ 
 and t computed according to the formul«, 
 
Differential Variatims, 
 
 K^S 
 
 cos (J sin /= ^ '^"^ . -sin ^ sin ; cos Zr (7) 
 
 (which are derived directly from the'^un l"" ^' , 
 tions(i)), when '/-.n.i . I 'undaniental cqua- 
 
 In a similar manner we obtain 
 -sin c/ir~i°'''i'?*^i" ? =« ?'' '-cos Z,(^ I 
 
 (It seems almost superfluous to point out that in .. 
 formula. ^ is the latitude. J the starCZ ! '^ 
 
 EQUAL ALTITUDES OF A FIXED STAR 
 
 .h 'U.r,i:„t2:;:."r. r'it°"ob' '"^ ^'-^"'■"^ 
 
 apparent altitudes will no, , °''='-'"«'ons, equal 
 
 find tl>e cha g„ 1 ' "IT "''"" .''"^ '"""<'"• To 
 
 change A» in^hetl'tirude' trL^^titrd";^" '' " 
 the equation. "'^ **^ differentiate 
 
 Sin«^sin^sinoVcos^coso-cos^ 
 Regardin^r <p and o^ as constant : whence 
 
 Cos«A«=-cos^cos<Jsin^i5 A^ 
 wh.e.« is in seconds .fare, and ./in 3econds of 
 
 If the altitude at the west observation IS the greater by 
 
 |i 
 
xo6 
 
 Effect of Errors. 
 
 £f.m the hour angle is increased bv a/, and the middle 
 
 time is Jucr-^ased by -—, wliich is thei "fore the correction 
 
 for the difference of altitudes. From the above equation 
 its value is 
 
 A « cos « 
 
 30 cos tp cos d sin t 
 If A is the azimuth of the object, we have 
 
 ,,. . cos 8 sin t 
 
 Sm A =- ^ 
 
 cos u 
 
 and the formula may be written 
 
 A a 
 
 30 cos <f sin k 
 
 which will be least when the denominator is greatest ; 
 that is, when A=(jo° or 270*, The star is therefore best 
 observed on or near the prime vertical. Low altitudes 
 are, however, best, owing to unccrtaintv in the refraction. 
 If the star's declinat'cn is nearly equal to the latitude 
 the interval between th3 observations will be short, which 
 is an advantage, as the instrument will jc less liable to 
 change. 
 
 EFFECT OF ERRORS IN THE DATA UPON THE TIME COM- 
 PUTED FROM AN ALTnUDH. 
 
 We have, from the first differential equation (8), multi- 
 plying At by 15 to reduce it to seconds of arc, 
 
 15 sin q cos d dt = ^^-)-cos Z t/^-f cos q d d 
 
 If the zenith distance above is erroneous we have 
 d<p=o, and d 8=0, and 
 
 sm q cos o cos ^ sir Z 
 from whirh it follows that a given erro;- in the al.itude will 
 have the 1. -^t effect upon the time when the object is on 
 the prim.- v. 'n : A!fo, that thest observations giv«; 
 the most ncc., te r* suits when the pla:e is on the 
 equator, aifd ib«.- ;east accurat? when at the poles. 
 
Effect of Errors. 
 
 toy 
 
 have 
 
 
 By putting d ^=0, </ J=o, and sin q cos (J=cos ip sin Z, 
 
 we have 
 
 by which 
 
 that a 
 
 d<p 
 
 cos <p tan Z 
 
 latitude also pro- 
 dares the least effsct when the star is on the prime verti- 
 cal, or tlje observer on tlie equator. In the former case 
 tan Z is infinite; therefore, if the latitude is uncertain, 
 we can still j^et {jood results by observing,' stars near the 
 I>rime vertical. 
 
 U d(^ — o and d(p=o we have 
 
 *^ cos tan q 
 
 Hance an error iu the star's djclination produces the 
 l«;ast effect when the star is on the prime vertical (since 
 tan (7 is a maximum when sin Z=i), and that, of different 
 stars, those near the equator are the best to observe. 
 
 In high latitudes it will often be necessary, in order to 
 avoid low altitudes, to obsf.rve stars at a distance from 
 the prime vertical. In this case small errors in the data 
 v/ill affect the clock correction. But if the star is ob- 
 served on successive days on the same side of the meri- 
 dian at about the same azimuth, the clock's rate will be 
 accurately obtained, though its actual error will be un- 
 certain. 
 
 If the same star is observed both east and west of the 
 meridian, and at the same distance from it, constant 
 errors d<p, dd, and d^, will give the same value oi dt, but 
 with opposite signs. Hence one clock correction will be 
 too large, and the other too small, and by the same 
 amount, and their mean will be the true clock correction 
 at the time of the star's meridian transit. 
 
 EFFECT OF ERRORS OF ZENITH DISTANCE, DECLINATION, 
 
 AND TIME, UPON THE LATITUDE FOUND BY 
 
 CIRCUM-MERIDIAN ALTITUDES. 
 
 ^ The formula for finding the meridian zenith distance 
 C' from a circum-meridian zenith distance Q is 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
|[*gr;*f 
 
 io8 
 
 The probable error. 
 
 c'-:-~A 
 
 m 
 
 where A =^^^l^^^^ ^ 
 
 Differentiating 
 have, since dip=clC + dd 
 
 sin (J*' 
 
 and m 
 
 2 sin^ 
 
 sin i' 
 
 and regarding A as constant, 
 
 we 
 
 the,, whole amount. The coefficient of dl ha, onnosite 
 signs for east and west hour anrfes ■ therefor^ IT 
 va.,o„s are taken of a number of I'lis of"nna ' a ti^nT" 
 east and west of the meridian, a Lah eons^t e,™ „' 
 n e"„lt' (o.- clock correction, win he eli,ni„:.: 
 
 takint th^^"' ,' '""" "= P"<:'i':ally attained by 
 
 taking the same number of observations at each side of 
 the mend,an, and at nearly equal intervals of time 
 
 elimina'ted h'" "" '''™'"^ '""""'<= ^''''^'' ''ff<=c's A is 
 
 fo^rb'yihtTsni'r"'"""""""'™ "'"■ "- '-■"■"= 
 
 THE PROBABLE ERROR. 
 
 , '""^' ^ "■= "■'" suppose a rifleman to have lired , 
 Ia.^e number of bullets at a targe, at the sam rang and 
 
 target 'it f" "J !™'"^' '"^ '^'"' °" -amini^rthe 
 the fe of^h" 'f '^^"f ?f"- have struck Within 
 
 one shot iLng withif^ r^'tt'cete^treve-n-h',' 
 other words, that it is an even chance whether or no. th 
 bullet w,ll stnke within that distance or not. It^d this 
 d,sja„ce may be taken as the probable error of any on, 
 
 car1?uT' 1 "" ""''" " '"""= "f independent but equally 
 careful measurements of a given quantity, such Is an 
 
i 
 
 The probable error. 
 
 ?tant, we 
 
 log 
 anjjle or a base line, they will all differ more or^^^T^e 
 closeness of the agreement depending on the instruments 
 employed and the care exercised; and the problem is to 
 decide what value is to be taken as the most likely to be 
 he correct one-in other words to have the smallest 
 piobable error. 
 
 If «n «2, 'H,8cc., are thedifferent measurements,;? their 
 number, and m their mean, then ;«=- -»-'^-2±_^^-__JLf^nJ 
 
 and it follows as an arithmetical consequence" that the 
 algebraical sum of the quantities {m~a\) (m-a ) Z 
 
 irr;! ''^ ^? ^^^-' ^° -- These^^iJ: titt't;' 
 
 called the "rcstduals." Another property o the mean I 
 
 &c. IS a miniimini. '' ' 
 
 Now it admits of proof timt the mean is that value de- 
 
 nved from the various measurements, which is likely to 
 
 'her:,:?^ '"■"■• ^'-™-o rtheprohahleerroVof 
 
 ~~~ir^~= - "" 0.674489 ' 
 
 And the probable error of any one measurement is the 
 probable error of the mean multiplied by ^- 
 
 It must be borne in mind that by the probable error 
 m, aken as so much is meant that it is an even ch nee 
 that the value taken ,s within that much of the truth 
 without i.gard to sign. Thus, if / be the mean of a 
 nnmber of measurements of a base line, and i foot ts 
 probable error, it is an even chance that its real vLue 
 lies between /— i and /+ 1. 
 
 Instead of using the probable error of a result we often ^ ^ 
 employ what is called its .ei.kt; a function which Ldi 
 cates he relative value to be assigned to the results as 
 regards precision. ^^ 
 
 t^z 
 
no 
 
 The probable error. 
 
 The formula for the weight is 
 
 '■' Probable &vvot=^^^M^ 
 V weight 
 
 (2) 
 
 JnVu ^^^^^ ''^"'' ^"^^^'^'y ^= the square of the 
 
 of the residuals being a minimum in the case ofthe mean 
 thzs method zs often called the "method of least squares"' 
 As a simple example ofthe calculation ofthe probable 
 error we w.ll take a side of a triangle forming part of a 
 tnangulat.on carried out near Kingston in 1881-82. Four 
 
 length, and the results were: 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 1060.1 yards 
 1060. g 
 1060.6 
 1060.4 
 
 4)4242.0 
 
 Mean= 1060.5 
 Here the squares ofthe residuals, in tenths of yards, are 
 
 I. 
 2. 
 3. 
 4. 
 
 16 
 16 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 Total 34 
 And the probable error ofthe mean is 
 
 V 34 
 -.-X 0.674489x3-6 inches. 
 
 =:3.54^nches. 
 
e of the 
 squares 
 e mean, 
 uares." 
 
 robable 
 rt of a 
 . Four 
 ain its 
 
 Part II. 
 
 in i 
 
 GEODESY. 
 
 'I ' 
 
 s, are 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 . K 
 
 THE FIGURE OF THE EARTH. 
 
 Geodesy is a word of Greek derivation, and signifies 
 division of the earth." Broadly speaking, it comprises 
 all surveying operations of such magnitude that the fig- 
 ure of the earth has to be taken into consideration. 
 
 The earth is an oblate spheroid— that is, the figure 
 forqied by the revolution of an ellipse round its 
 minor a:as-the polar axis being shorter than the 
 equatorial by about 26-88 miles. This has been 
 proved in two ways. Firstly, by pendulum experiments, 
 which shew that the force of gravity increases from the 
 equator towards the poles ; secondly, by actual measure- 
 
 ! Kl 
 
 i\ 1 
 
11 
 
 112 
 
 Figure of the earth. 
 
 ments of portions of meridianal arcs. A^it^considor-. 
 ion wm show that if the curvature of a mcridiana 1 ' 
 elhpt.caUnd therefore decreasing towards the poles the 
 length on the earth's surface of a degree of latitud'mu 
 be greater in high than in low latitudes. That is Ta 
 and B are two points on a meridian near thf ec ua of 
 
 and C tTL t' ' "'•''" """"^^ ^" astronomical ladt^.d:.' 
 and C and D two ponits on a meridian in a high latitude 
 and also differing by the same amount, then ft, 
 tances A B and C D are n.easured on the ground 11 
 will be found to be less than C D. This has a tually 
 been done at various parts of the earth's surface-La'^ 
 land, Peru France, Russia, (where an arc of ovear^vTs 
 
 adopted ,s to measure a base very accnratelv -ind 
 from It to connect by means of a chain of trian' Jl.t on 
 two distant stations which are as nearly as po Sbl o" 
 he same meridian. This being done we can calculate 
 the actual distance from one of the stations to the pJi I 
 where a perpendicular drawn to the meridian of th it s " 
 S. f "f r^her station meets the meridian. The 
 latitudes of the two stations are found by very care ul 
 astronomical observations, and their difference, ^akenTn 
 connection with the calculated distance on the meridian 
 gives the curvature of the arc, since the radius of curva 
 
 atitude in circular measure. There is, however, one 
 
 the la;> 7"V" ^^.*^™"-^--^ of this kind. In fi iding 
 the la tudes of stations we are in general dependent on 
 the direction of the plumb line; and should there, as 
 often happens, be a local abnormal deviation of the 
 later from the true perpendicular, the resulting latitude' 
 wi 1 be erroneous. This was proved many years agX 
 taking the latitudes of two stations on oppJte side^ o a 
 mountain in Perthshire, and measuring Jhe true hoi 'l! 
 tal distance between them, when it was found that the 
 
^^^e of the Earth. 
 
 Betweeen A iind B... 2=;' co 
 •tJ and C 17" 
 
 while .he actual differences, as found by triangula.ion. 
 
 Between A and B 24" 2^7 
 
 B and C r4".ig 
 
 As a rule, the deviation seldom exceeds a f.yv seconds 
 except in the neighbourhood of great mount.i^ Z 
 as at the foot of the Himalayas. tvher^eT -"rmXas' 
 
 Where there is considerable deviation in level countries 
 It .s no doubt caused by neighbouring portions orthe 
 Z %TJ:7 '''-' ''''-'' - li.lfter than the avt! 
 
 sy..rnetrica,ly g.ouped round ita.::Wn ^n tL t^l^^ 
 and ong..uae of each obtained by astron^micll obta 
 t ons. The actual distance and azimuth of the central 
 station rem each of the others being known by tr'an 1 
 
 latitude and lon"itude of th. 7 1 ^'^ ""^^^ 
 
 Dared with ,v\ *''^ ''^"''"^^ station being com- 
 
 pared wuh the latuude and longitude as obtained by 
 
 ill 
 
 r-i 
 
 i 'i 
 
 
1^ 
 
 V 
 
 114 
 
 Figure of the Earth. 
 
 if 
 
 astronomical observations will give the deviation of the 
 plumb line. 
 
 If a and b are the semi-major and semi-minor axes of an 
 
 ellipse, the distance of the centre from either focus is 
 
 |/rt»Z_^3, and this quantity divided by a is called the 
 
 "eccentricity." This is generally written e. The quantity 
 
 a 
 
 -b. 
 
 is called the "compression" or "ellipticity," and is 
 
 denoted by c. The latest calculations make the com- 
 pression of the earth about ^^j, the ratio of the semi- 
 axes being believed to be 292 to 293. The true measure of 
 the compression is the difference of the semi-axes divided 
 by the mean radius of curvature of the spheroid. The 
 equator has also been found to be elliptical, its major 
 axis being about *oo yards longer than its rninor axis. 
 
 It should be noted that the expression e has different 
 meanings in different books. English writers occasion- 
 ally employ it for the compression or ellipticity, while in 
 American books it is used in the same sense as here, 
 namely, for the eccentricity. Even in different chapters of 
 the same work the letter e is often used both for the 
 compression and the eccentricity. 
 
 The accompanying | 
 figure represents a 
 section of the earth. 
 PP' is the polar axis, | 
 QE an equatorial di- 
 ameter, C the centre, I 
 F a focus of the 
 ellipse, A a point on 
 the surface, A T a 
 tangent at A, and! 
 Z A O perpendicular ^''s- 3° 
 
 to A T. Z' is the geocentric zenith, and Z' C E' is its 
 declination. The latter is called the geocentric or reduced lati- 
 
Figure of the Earth. 
 
 "5 
 
 /«rf. of A. Z O' E' is thegeographkal ^r^^^tZ^^iiMA^^^ 
 t •.°' ^^^'^ ^^"^d tJ^e reduction of the latitude. 
 
 It IS evident that the geocentric is always less than the 
 geographical latitude. 
 
 LetCE=:«. CP=6. Let .- be the compression and . 
 the eccentricrty. 
 
 a—b 
 
 a , 
 CF 
 
 _b_ 
 
 a 
 
 e= 
 
 C F2 
 CE3' 
 
 CF 
 CE ~P F 
 
 C E3 "■^~ (^£2 
 
 63 
 
 ^i-^^i_(i_,). 
 
 That is, e2. 
 or, c= i/gcH^ (I) 
 
 TO FIND THE REDUCTION OF THE LATITUDE. 
 
 Taking the centre of the ellipse as the origin of axes 
 the equation of the ellipse will be 
 
 «? ^ 62 ^ 
 
 Let ^ be the geographical latitude 
 9* " geocentric " 
 
 We have, tan a>=^— ^ 
 
 dy 
 
 and from the triangle ACB, tan ^'= 
 
 X 
 
 or. 
 
 Differentiating the equation of the ellipse, we have 
 
 _y_^ b^dx 
 
 X a2 dy 
 
 tan 5^= -^tan ^—(1-^2) tan ,p 
 
 lo hnd the reduction, or^_^', we use the general 
 development m series of an equation of the form 
 tan A'=-/) tan y, which is 
 x—y=^q sin 2y-fj ^2 sin 4v4-&c. 
 
 1: 
 
 i 
 
1^ 
 
 ii6 
 
 Figure of the Earth. 
 
 in which (7=^-— 
 
 Applying this to the development of (2) we find, after 
 dividing by sin i" to reduce the terms of the series to 
 seconds, and putting x=^<p' , y=^(p. 
 
 9—9 — 
 
 - J „ sm 2 <p ^ „sm 4 W—&C. (z) 
 
 sm I 2 sm I ~ ^"^ 
 
 in which q- 
 
 I — C2 
 
 The known value of e gives ^, i.nd thence <p—tp' for 
 any given value of f . 
 
 N.B.— 5^ is negative, and q^ is very small compared 
 with it ; therefore (f — if' is positive. 
 
 In some books on geodesy t'l ; ex;iri!S'iion "rcluction of 
 tbe latitule" is applieJ to the aiig!.; A' C E, whire A' is 
 the point in wliicli BA p-jhcid me-ts the circle de- 
 scribed with centre C and radius C E. Let this angle be f" . 
 
 tan (p' _ B A_ 6 
 
 a 
 
 Then 
 
 tan <p" BA'" 
 by the properties of the ellipse. And since tan '/ 
 
 .2 t^" <P 
 
 we have 
 and 
 
 tan ^ a2 ^ ^ 
 
 T — -»r-= 7— tan (p -~ -r-tan c>=- — 
 
 tan <p b2 ^ b ^ b 
 
 tan <p tan <p" 
 
 tan f" tan ^' 
 
 TO FIND THE RADIUS OF THE TERRESTRIAL SPHEROID FOR 
 A GIVEN LATITUDE. 
 
 Let p (or A C) be the radius for latitude ^, 
 We have, p — \/ ^9 ^ yi 
 
 To express x and y in terms of cp, we have, substituting 
 I — e* for-^ in the equation to the ellipse and its differ- 
 ential equation, 
 
 "^ 
 
(5) 
 
 tj on i>f 
 
 "^ 
 
 Figure of the Earth. 
 
 u9 
 
 117 
 
 ^» + 
 
 J'^ 
 
 I— ^a 
 
 -a^ 
 
 -~ =• (i~e') tcixi <p 
 
 X 
 
 whence, by elimination, we find 
 
 ^^ a cos Y> 
 
 Vi—e^ 
 
 ^nd hence, p=a{^IZ3jl^}l 
 \ I — I 
 
 Vi~e^ sin' <p 
 (i — «') a sin ^ 
 
 sin^ ^ 
 
 = a i ^ZZ3J^^}^9 + e* sin» <p . ^ 
 ■e^ sin' <p j 
 
 (4) 
 
 TO FIND THE LENGTH OF THE GREAT NORMAL, A O, FOR 
 A GIVEN LATITUDE. 
 
 From the figure we have 
 
 Great normal=^.^^L?l 
 cos f 
 
 the"'normaI.'° ^''" "°™" "'" '" '""'''" "' =™P'^ ^= 
 
 g_cosj p sin i'' _ 
 
 TO FIND THE RADIUS OF CURVATURE OF THE TERRESTRIAL 
 MERIDIAN FOR A GIVEN LATITUDE. 
 
 Denote this radius by R. 
 
 We have, from the Differential Calculus, 
 
 ^{^ - (I)')* 
 
 
 i-1 f\ 
 
zx8 
 
 Figure of the Earth. 
 
 From the equation to the ellipse we have 
 
 dy _ bj X 
 dx~ a^ y 
 
 d^ _ _ _b*_ 
 dx^ " 
 
 whence 
 
 R 
 
 a2y* 
 
 {a*y2-\-b^x^)i 
 
 a* h* 
 
 Observing that b^ = a^ (i—e^), we find, by substitut- 
 ing the values of a- and j/ in terms of ^ (page 11^.) 
 
 R =^ ci(i-e^) ^ jy^, , (6) 
 (i— c2 sin2 (p)\ o^-^y' ^ 
 
 This last equation gives the length of a second of lati- 
 tude at a given latitude, since it is equal to R sin i" 
 
 The following formula is sometimes used for the radius 
 of curvature of the meridian, 
 
 R = — \ {a — b) cos 2 y 
 
 It also admits of proof that the normal at any point is 
 the radius of curvature of a section of the earth's surface 
 through the normal and at right angles to the meridian. 
 
 From equations (5) and (6) we see that the normal at 
 any point is always greater than the radius of curvature 
 of the meridian at that point. 
 
 If the earth were a sphere the shortest line on- its sur- 
 face between any two points A and B (otherwise called 
 the geodesic line) would be an arc of a great circle, and 
 the azimuth of A at B would differ from that of B at A 
 by 180 .^ But on the surface of a spheroid the geodesic 
 line is, except when both points are on the equator or on 
 the same meridian, a curve of double curvature. The two 
 azimuths, also, will not, except in certain cases, differ 
 from each other by exactly *8©^.,^ The reason of this is 
 that the vertical plane at A passing through B will not 
 
 -- !'. 
 
Figure of the Earth. 
 
 "9 
 
 coincide with the vertical plane at B v^^^i^^^^~;^ 
 
 These two planes will, of course, intersect'at A and b" 
 
 , /'^^'V"^^""^^^^'""^ ^vith the surface of the spheroid 
 
 pace I„ add, ...n to these two lines and the geodesic 
 l-ne there w.il also be what is known as the line !/ «Z 
 '-"/o the two points-that is the line on everVpoi '"f 
 wh.ch the hne of sight of the telescope of a theoVoh h 
 
 dotted "'J"^^•"^"^ -'^ ^->'y levelled would, wh 
 directed on one station, intersect the other on the tele 
 scope being turned over. 
 
 
CHAPTER II. 
 
 OEODETICAL OPERATIONS. 
 
 The methods adopted in the old world for mapping 
 large tracts of country have been reversed in America. 
 Instead of starting from carefully measured bases, and 
 carrying out chains of triangulation connecting various 
 principal points in such a manner that the relative 
 positions of the latter with respect to each other may be 
 ascertained within a few inches, though several hundred 
 miles apart, the system pursued (if we except the U. S. 
 Coast Survey and some other triangulations) has been 
 to take certain meridians and parallels of latitude inter- 
 secting each other ; to trace and mark out these meridians 
 and parallels on the ground ; to divide the figures 
 enclosed by them into blocks or "checks ;" and to further 
 subdivide the latter into townships, sections, and quarter 
 sections. Although the method of triangulation is incom- 
 parably the most accurate, the American plan has the 
 advantage of rapidity and cheapness. As the latter is 
 very simple, and is fully explained in the Canadian Gov- 
 ernment Manual of Survey, it will not be further touched 
 upon here. 
 
 At the commencement of a triangulation a piece of 
 tolerably level ground having been selected, a base line, 
 
 
Tnauffulatiofi. 
 
 . lai 
 
 cliam of tna,n.|,.s ,, s,,^,t«l. I„ ,i,e f„r,„e,. case th^ 
 
 nancies are expanded as rapidly as possible ,11 ,he„ Ire 
 
 lame enourf, to cover the whole country with a netwo k 
 
 "f pntnary tr,a,„des. This is done by taking ang losfrl 
 
 d tan , f " "" "'°""""" '"""■ ■•""' calcnia ing thei 
 I stances by ,ng„,„„ctry. The instru.nont is then placed 
 
 enTt : in '":r"'r r'""': -■" -«'- -"- S 
 ;.ei; Id';': rb :ere,''° ■r',:;,'':j"'-'--'^ »- 
 
 and e.te„de<l til, the whl^isV;;:, ':::r:d Irh^e 
 p™,ary tnangles the sides of which should be astargH: 
 
 Smaller, or secondary, triangles are formed within the 
 pr.mary ones to fix the position of important poins 
 wh.ch may serve as starting points for raverses & 
 
 da;;'rer""' " ""^°'-'™- f°™^<' withi„ theL™; 
 cit^uLtScl.'" T5;eir:^es '::etft 't '"""'-"^ '» 
 
 =>• iiitir siaes die often from ^o to 60 nr 
 
 The louges s.de ■„ the British triangulation was ,T 
 The stdes of the secondary triangles are from abou , to 
 20 mtles, and those of the tertiary triangles fiveor"Ls 
 
 The larger triangles should be as nearly equilateral as 
 
 .rcmnstances admit of. The reason for having te„ so 
 
 ■s ha, w„h ,h,sform small errors in ,he measuremen" 
 
 of ,he,r angles wll have a minimum effec, on the cdcn 
 
 .e, lengths of the sides. Such triangles are a ed 
 
 "well-conditioned" ones. 
 
 The original base has to be reduced to the level of the 
 
 re^tTc fthri^'h :r f "-^^ '^^^^^^" ^'^ ^^^-^^ -^^r 
 
 verticals through its ends intersect the sea level must be 
 
 V-.** e 
 
122 
 
 Tnangulation. 
 
 II 
 
 ascertained. The exact geographical position of one end, 
 and the azimuth of the other with respect to it, must of 
 course be known. The angles of all the principal triangles 
 must be measured with the greatest exactness that the 
 best instruments admit of, the lengths of the sides calcu- 
 lated by trigonometry, and their azimuths worked out. 
 The work (when carried on on a very large scale) is still 
 further complicated by the earth's surface being not a 
 sphere but a spheroid. The accuracy of the triangulation 
 istestedby what is called a "base of verification." That is, 
 a side of one of the small triangles is made to lie on 
 suitaole ground, where it can be actually measured. Its 
 length, as thus obtained, compared with that given by 
 calculation through the chain of triangles, shows what 
 reliance can be placed on the intermediate work. 
 
 As instances: The triangulation commenced at the 
 Lough Foyle base in the North of Ireland was carried 
 through a long chain of triangles to a base of verification 
 on Salisbury plain, and the actual measured length of the 
 latter was found to differ only 5 inches from the length as 
 calculated through several hundred miles of triangulation. 
 An original base was measured at Fire Island, near New 
 York, and afterwards connected with a base of verifica- 
 tion on Kent Island in Chespeake Bay. The actual 
 distance between them was 208 miles, and the distance 
 through the 32 intervening triangles 320. The difference 
 between the computed and measured lengths of the base 
 of verification was only 4 inches. In Algiers, two bases 
 about 10 kilometres long were connected by a chain of 88 
 triangles. Their calculated and measured distances 
 agreed within 16 inches. 
 
 If the country to be triangulated is very extensive— 
 as, for instance, in the case of India— instead of covering 
 it with a network of triangulation, it may^ntersected in 
 the first place by chains of triangles, either single or double. 
 
Base Lines. 
 
 123 
 
 and bases measured at certain places/usually wher--^ these 
 chains meet. In India the chains run generally either 
 north and south or east and west, and form a great frame 
 or lattice work on which to found the further survey of 
 the country. A double chain of triangles forms, of 
 course a series of quadrilateral figures, in each of which 
 both the diagonals, as well as the sides, may be calculated. 
 
 The following is a brief account of the measurements 
 ot some celebrated base lines : 
 
 In 1736 a base line had to be measured in Lapland for 
 the purpose of finding the length of an arc of the meridian 
 by triangulation. A distance of about 9 miles was mea- 
 ured in mid winter on the frozen surface of the River 
 Tornea. By means of a standard toise brought from 
 France, a length of exactly 5 toises (about 32 feet) was 
 marked on the inside wall of a hut, and eight rods of pine 
 terminated with metal studs for contact, cut to this exact 
 length. It had been previously ascertained that changes 
 of temperature had no apparent effect on their length 
 The surveying party was divided into two, each taking 
 four rods, and two independent measurements of the base 
 were made, the results agreeing within four inches. The 
 time occupied was seven days. The rods were probably 
 placed end to end on the surface of the snow. 
 
 The same year a base 7.6 miles long was measured near 
 yuito in Peru, at an altitude of nearly 8000 feet The 
 work occupied 29 days. Rods 20 feet long, terminated 
 at each end by copper plates for contact, were used 
 The rods were laid horizontally, changes of level being 
 effected by a plummet suspended by a fine hair. The 
 rods were compared daily with a toise marked on an 
 iron bar which had been laid off from a standard toise 
 brought from Paris. This base was the commencement 
 of a chain of triangles for the measurement of a meri- 
 dianal arc. Three years later another base, 6.4 miles long 
 
124 
 
 Base Lines. 
 
 
 was nieasured near the south end of this chain and onlv 
 occnp,ed ten days. The party was divided into'.wo c:™" 
 pan,es wh.ch measured tne line in opposite directions 
 
 melced'trtTr'™'' """"'■ "^ "'"'' ''"«^'" ™^ "- 
 He^th I , "^^f "'■"•"ent of a base on Hounslow 
 Heath, which was chosen from the great evenness and 
 openness of the f;ro„nd. Three deal rods, t.pped „' h 
 bell metal and .o feet long, were used at firs . But it was 
 
 ™™i y'tf'th;-;""' r ^"1='^" ^^ ='"'"^- '" '^""■ 
 
 Cth ^f t, fr^P'^"'' t''" Slass tubes of the same 
 
 iscfrti: d" » rP'""°" '°' temperature had been 
 
 ascertained, were substituted, the temperatures of the 
 ubes betng obtained by attached thermometers The 
 ^eng h of the base when reduced to the sea lev and 6^ 
 Faht. was 9,134! yards. This distance was subsequentfv 
 
 40 I nks half an mch square in section. A second siniH.r 
 chatn was used as a standard of comparison The chai,^ 
 was laid in five deal coffers carried on trestles Id 
 kept stretched by a weight of a8 pounds t'c act Z 
 
 olT'' f "mf " ™= """''' '' =" ="''- ^^ •" 
 
 steel TJL r° "?^''^'«-^'"ems (glass tubes and 
 
 steel chains) agreed within two inches. 
 
 Two bases, each about ji miles long, were subse- 
 quently measured in France-one near Par s, the other at 
 Carcassonne in the south. Four rods were ised The ' 
 were composed of two strips of metal in contact (patilum 
 and copper), forming a metallic thermometer carried o^ 
 a stout beam of wood. Each rod was supported on two 
 .ron tripods fitted with levelling screws, a^d there was In 
 arrangement for measuring their inclination. 
 
 The Lough Foyle base was measured with Colbv's 
 compensation bars; an arrangement in which the ,,„e„,« 
 expansions and contractions of two parallel bars o differ 
 ant metals (brass and iron), ,0 feet long, are utili/ed o ktp 
 
Base Lines. 
 
 bury Plain base was measured in the same way Colby's" 
 bars were subsequently used for ten bases inlndiabu 
 were not found togive very reliable results there ' 
 
 sattn J7'°'?'"' ""^ ^°'^^'^ arrangement is the compen- 
 atmg apparatus used in the United States coast smvev ^ 
 It consists of a bar of brass and a bar of iron a I ttl.!^ 
 than SIX metres long and parallel to each ohe"' Th bar'.' 
 
 Sr";?^^"^'^^^"^"^^"^' but free to movl'^t th 
 other Their cross-sections are so arranged that llll 
 
 versejy as tHfespecific heats, allowance being made for 
 
 hei difference of conducting power. The bras bar is 
 
 tl r"; -^'--^f on rollers mounted in suspen ! 
 
 to'itts ruJo: r brLvr °" ''''' -'-' '-^-' 
 
 i- 
 
 'iM,Cl tS-. 
 
 11 
 
II 
 
 126 
 
 Base Lines. 
 
 fig. 31 
 
 The annexed figure shows the arrangement at the two 
 
 ends the left hand part being the compensation end. It 
 
 will be seen that the lever of compensation (/) is pivoted 
 
 on he lower bar (a), a knife edge on its inner side abutting 
 
 on the end of the iron bar (b.) This lever terminates at 
 
 Its upper end in a knife edge (^ in such a position that 
 
 whatever be the expansion or contraction of the bars it 
 
 always retains an invariable distance from their other 
 
 end. This knife edge presses against a collar in 
 
 the shdmg rod (d), moving in a frame (/) fixed to the 
 
 iron bar, and is kept back by the spiral spring (s). The 
 
 rod IS tipped with an agate plane (p) for contact. The 
 
 vernier {v) serves to read off the difference of lengths of 
 
 the bars as a check. 
 
 At the other end where the bars are united a sliding 
 rod terminates in a bluftt horizontal knife edge (g) its 
 inner edge abutting against a contact lever (A) pivoted at 
 (»)• This lever, when pressed by the sliding rod, comes 
 in contact with the short tail of the level (k), which is 
 mounted on trunnions and not balanced. For a certain 
 position of the sliding rod this bubble comes to the centre 
 and this position gives the true length of the measuring 
 bar. Another use of the level is to ensure a constant 
 pressure at the points of contact, p and g. To the lever 
 and level is attached the arm of a sector which gives the 
 inchnation of the bar. 
 
 J 
 
 ^ 
 
J 
 
 Base Lines. 
 
 127 
 
 level sector and vernier, are read through glass doors 
 tTesVe"s T^'n'^' :"" ^"^ "-"«'<' on a ptof 
 rSgned'^rAl*!''""""^^'''""'-"'"^-^''^^ 
 
 paSr'the'°;r'T".'""'' '°"«' '"=^^"'-='' -i"- "•- ap. 
 paratus, the greatest supposable error was commit.^ 
 
 th 'onrtr^"'- ""^ '"^ *''^" -.::„thT^ an' 
 
 men. On another base, six and three quarter miles ?„n„ 
 
 annr"''' '"" *^^ '^^^ "-an one ten"h oTan °ch' 
 and the greatest supposable error less than three-temhs' 
 
 GellTrttaes".'"" '"•'' '■' -"^^="""8 a base in 
 eorgia thre . t.mes, twice in winter and once in summer 
 at temperatures ranging from i8- to 10/ Faht Th^ 
 discrepancies of the three measures with their respecliv! 
 -cans were, in n.illimetres,-8.ro,-o.3., and "sTi ' 
 
 qul^trfec7ilr."''' "TT' "'^' "■= >PP-«- - n°t 
 
 .r^^^ure is'r„";oX •''"''"^ ™ "-""" "■' 
 a w^;^str:rt„^%rst:: ■" ^^r^s 
 
 surveys ,t may be sufficient to nn.asure the b».. . 
 
 F -V.C ui pjanx, which is made to adhpr#> ♦« fK^ 
 ground by means of pointed spikes on its under L^ce! 
 
 oarnrd'^^^'' ^"" ^^^«°"^d' baked, boiled in drying oil 
 painted and varnished, may be u«?pd Th u f j"^ , ' 
 be levelled or h=.v« fk T , ^"^^^ ^^°"^d either 
 
 ieveued or have their angle of inclination read. If the 
 
 li 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 <M>»i'— t'-C<i £{ 
 
 t^^VU 
 
 i'Mii 
 
ir 
 
 s 
 
 128 
 
 Base Lines. 
 
 i 
 
 Bf 
 
 I 
 
 ground is uneven they may be levelled on trestles with 
 sliding telescopic supports. The ends of the rods should 
 be capped with metal, either wedge-shaped or hemi- 
 spherical in form, and either placed in actual contact, or 
 the spaces between them measured by graduated glass 
 wedges. If the end of one rod has to be placed on a dif- 
 ferent level to that of the next a fine plumb line may be 
 u«=ed • or the rods may have fine lines marked at each 
 end of the unit of length, so that one rod may be made to 
 overlap the other with the two marks exactly correspond- 
 ing. This plan answers well on ice. 
 
 Before measuring an important base it is usual to make 
 a preliminary approximate measurement of the line and 
 also to get an accurate section of it by levelling. Suit- 
 able points are selected for dividing it into sections, and 
 these points are accurately adjusted into line by means of 
 a transit at one end. It may happen, however, that it is 
 impracticable to have all the segments in a straight line, 
 in which case the angles they make with each other niust, 
 of course,- be exactly measured. Any deviation also from 
 a true horizontal line must be recorded in order that the 
 base may be reduced to the sea level. The ends of the 
 base as well as of the sections, are generally marked by 
 microscopic dots on metallic plates let into massive 
 stones embedded in masonry, and are thus permanently re- 
 corded. The mark itself may be a minute cross on a piece 
 of brass, or a dot on the end of a platinum wire set 
 vertically in a piece of lead run into a hole in the stone. 
 
 If the rods used in measuring the base expand and con- 
 tract with changes of temperature the latter must be re- 
 corded at regular intervals of time, as the rods are at 
 their true length only when at a certain standard tempera- 
 ture. 
 
 If the base, or any portion of it, is not level, its inclina- 
 
2s with 
 should 
 hemi- 
 :act, or 
 i glass 
 n a dif- 
 may be 
 it each 
 nade to 
 sspond- 
 
 to make 
 ine, and 
 . Suit- 
 ms, and 
 neans of 
 hat it is 
 jht line, 
 er must, 
 Iso from 
 that the 
 Is of the 
 irked by 
 massive 
 lentlyre- 
 )n a piece 
 wire set 
 he stone. 
 
 and con- 
 st be re- 
 is are at 
 tempera- 
 
 ts inclina- 
 
 Then b=.B cos d. ^^^ ^"^^« °^ inclination. 
 
 above . K As .ivenTnJnrsrhair '''''' °^ ^ 
 B-b^B (i-cos 0)=^ B sin»i- 
 
 =i B 0i sin» I' 
 
 ==0.00000004231 09 B_ 
 
 If the base is intersected hv =, . • 
 
 cannot be conveniently measured .'"' °' ""'""^ ^^'^^' 
 as follows : ^ "measured across we may proceed 
 
 Let AB CD be I 
 
 the base, and BC 
 
 the interrupted! 
 
 portion (Fig. 32). 
 
 Let AB^a, Cd] 
 
 =b, and BC=.r. 
 
 Take an exterior] 
 
 station E and! 
 
 measure the 
 
 angles AEB (a)' 
 
 AEC (/9; and AED pi^^ 3, 
 
 (r). Then if ^ is such an angle that 
 
 tan» ^= -i_^_ j^ sin /9 sin (r~a 
 
 It may be proved that 
 
 2 2 CO? » 
 
 The base is, of course, « + 6+;,. 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
*-; 
 
 I 
 
 130 
 
 Base Lines. 
 
 Ifthe 
 
 nature of the ground necessitates an angle C be- 
 tween two portions of the base A C, C B, we can find 
 the direct distance A B thus : The angle C (which is very 
 obtuse) is measured with great care. Let i8o°— = ^, 
 A C=6, C B=«, and A B=c. 
 
 Then c'=a^+b^ + 2 ab cos 
 and (if G is not more than 10°) 
 
 COS 6=1 —, nearly. 
 
 = {a + by—abd^ 
 
 (a b 0^ X 
 
 and c=(a + 6)|i-7;;3:x,2-^ 
 
 t 
 
 = (fl + 6)]i-i 
 
 abe^ 
 
 (« + 6)8 "^ 
 
 ab 6^ sin* i' 
 
 &c. 
 
 a + b 
 
 2 irt+6) 
 
 = « + 6^<).ooooooo42 3 1 ■ 
 
 6 being in minutes. 
 
 To reduce a measured base to the sea level we must 
 
 know the height of every portion of it in order to get its 
 
 mean height. Let /be the length of a rod, and/f its height; 
 
 I' its projection on the sea level, and r the radius of the 
 
 earth. 
 
 JL- J— 
 
 r ~r-\-h' 
 
 Then 
 
 or 
 
 r + h 
 
 I 1, nearly. 
 
 If w be the number of rods in the base and n l=h; 
 then the length of the base reduced to the sea level will be 
 
 L 1 1 — MJ — ~-^ being the mean height of all the 
 
 { r n J 7t 
 
 rods. , 
 
Base Lines. 
 
 ;le C be- 
 can find 
 
 .u 
 
 : IS very 
 —C=d, 
 
 we must 
 ;o get its 
 its height; 
 us of the 
 
 J n /=L; 
 vel will be 
 
 of all the 
 
 131 
 
 
 The base thus reduced is a curve. To find the length 
 
 of th?l^." [ '.'■ ^^i'^^^^vided by .4 times the «.«; 
 ot the earth s radms. 
 
 MEASUREMENT OF BASES BY SOUND. 
 
 This is a rough method which has sometimes to be 
 adopted in hydrographic surveys of extensive shoals which 
 have no pomts above water. It should, if possible, only 
 be adopted in calm dry weather. The velocity of sound 
 in air is 1089.42 feet per second at 32" Faht. It is un- 
 effected by the wind, the barometer pressure, and the 
 hygrometic condition of the air. The observers are 
 posted at both ends of the base and are provided with 
 guns, watches, and thermometers. When the gun at one 
 end IS fired the observer at the other notes thelnterval in 
 seconds and fractions between the flash and the report 
 The guns are fired alternately from both ends at least 
 three times, a preparatory signal being given. 
 
 The value of the velocity of sound given above must be 
 quantty ^^^P-^^ure (f) by multiplying it by the 
 
 i/i+(f— 32"))Ko.o"^^^ 
 
 Of course the distance is the corrected velocity multi- 
 plied by the mean of the observed intervals of time The 
 errors of observation are always considerable, but are no 
 greater for long distances than for short ones. 
 
 ASTRONOMICAL BASE LINES. 
 
 In cases where no suitable ground for a measured base 
 IS available two convenient stations may be selected as 
 the ends of an imaginary base line, and their latitude 
 and longitude, with the azimuth of one from the other 
 ascertamed by astronomical observations. We shall 
 then have the length and position of the base with more 
 or less accuracy, and a triangulation can be carried on 
 
 II 
 
 j • 
 
 'il 
 
u 
 
 L 
 
 132 
 
 Bait Lines. 
 
 from it. The base chosen should be as lonpf as possible, 
 but not greater than one degree. None of the sides of 
 the triangles should be greater than the base. The azi- 
 muths of the sides being known, the positions cf the 
 observed points can be plotted by co-ordinates. 
 
 If the zenith telescope and portable transit telescope 
 are used the latitude can be determined within 10", the 
 longitude and azimuth within 30". With the sextant 
 these errors are at least doubled. Differences cf longitude 
 may be determined by flashing signals. 
 
 •^ 
 
T 
 
 ■^ 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 TRlANaULATION. 
 
 Having diseased the measurement of base lines we 
 ave now to consider the triangulation. It is evTde^ 
 that t e , tter may be commenced without waiting to om 
 plete the former. The first thing to be done isi select 
 the stations and to erect the necessary points to be ob 
 served, or ''signals" as they are called! L a hilly count 
 the mountam tops naturally offer the best stations, as being 
 conspicuous objects and affording the most distant vlws 
 In this case the s:.e of the triangles is only li.nited by the 
 distance at which the signals can be observed. Thul 
 n the Ordnance Survey of Ireland the average length of 
 the sides of the primary triangles was 60 miles! while ome 
 
 cTrrdTxS " "" i'" ^'^ triangulation' which wa 
 earned in 1879 across the Mediterranean between Spain 
 
 oDserved at a distance of 170 miles. 
 
 In a flat country lofty signals have to be erected not 
 only that they may be mutually visible, but in order'tha 
 the rays of light may not pass too close to the surface of 
 he earth, as they would be thereby .00 much affected b^ 
 
 ':!:rr,jr:ti^- ^^-^^^^^ ■•= consid. 
 
 limit advisable. If h', h" 
 
 H 
 
 are the heights of two 
 
 Hi! 
 
134 
 
 Triangulation. 
 
 signals in feet and d their distance in miles;, then, on a 
 flat country cr over water, they will not, under ordinary 
 circumstances, be visible to each other if d is greater than 
 J ( W*'+ W* ) ^'I'c most difficult country of all in which 
 to carry out a triangulation is one that is flat and covered 
 with forest. 
 
 Formerly, conspicuous objects, such as the points of 
 church spires, were commonly used as signals; but of late 
 years this has not been done, because in all large triangles 
 it is necessary to measure all the three angles, and this 
 cannot well be done directly in the case of such objects. 
 The form of the signals varies much. Whatever kind be 
 used the centre of the theodolite must be placed exactly 
 under or over the centre of the station, and if a scaffold- 
 ing has to be employed the portion on which the instru- 
 ment is supported must be disconnected with that on 
 which the observers stand. One kind of signal is a ver- 
 tical pole with tripod supports, the pole being set up with 
 its summit exactly over the station. It may be sur- 
 mounted by two circular disks of iron at right angles to 
 each other. A piece of square boarding, painted white 
 with a vertical black stripe about four inches wide, can be 
 seen a long way off. Flags may be used, but are not al- 
 ways easy to see. A good form of signal is a hemisphere 
 of silvered copper with its axis vertical. This w Jl reflect 
 the rays of the sun in whatever position the latter may be, 
 but a correction for "phase" will be required, as the rays 
 will be reflected from different parts of the hemisphere 
 according to the time of day. The ordinary signal used 
 in the United States is a pole lo to 25 feet high, sur- 
 mounted by a flag, and steadied by braces. With respect 
 to its diameter, the rub is that for triangles with sides 
 not exceeding five miles it should not be more than five 
 inches. If more than five miles, five to eight inches. 
 Various other forms of special signals are used in the U. S. 
 Coast Survey. Amongst others may be mentioned a 
 
Triangtilation. 
 
 135 
 
 on 
 
 pyramid of four poles, with its upper portion boarded over 
 and termmat.n^' in a point, <lirectly u.ulcr which the theo- 
 dolite IS placed. In En^dand do,d,lc scaftbldin,^s as 
 high as 80 feet were used, the inner scaffolding^ carryii,. 
 Uie instrument and the outer one the observers. In 
 Russia a triangulation had to be carried on over an arc 
 of more than 500 miles across a flat swampy country 
 covered with impenetrable forests, and scaffoldinf^s of as 
 much as 146 feet high had to be erected. On the prairies 
 of the Western States towers have had to be bu.It ; as also 
 has been done in India, where solid towers were used at 
 first, but were afterwards superseded by hollow ones, which 
 allowed the instruments to be centred vertically over the 
 sta ions. The centres of trigonometrical stations are gen- 
 erally indicated by a well-defined mark on the upper sur- 
 face of a block of stone buried at a sufficient distance be- 
 low the surface. In the Algerian triangulation the stations 
 were marked by flat-toppod ron. of masonry havin-^ a 
 vertical a.xial aperture c„ unicnting with the station 
 mark. 
 
 In sunlight, stations may be rendered visible at a great 
 distance by means of the heliostat, and at night the elec- 
 tric light is now much employed. . In the triangulation 
 across the Mediterranean already alluded to the signal 
 hgh s were produced by steam-engines of six-horse power 
 working magneto-electric machines. Tliese lights woio 
 placed m the fc. us of a reflector 20 inche. in diameter 
 consisting of a concavo-convex lens of glass with the 
 convex surface silvered. The curvatures of the surfaces 
 corrected the lens for spherical aberration, and it threw 
 out a cone of white light, having an amplitude of 24' 
 which was directed on the distant station bv a telescope' 
 A refracting lens, eight inches in ' diameter, was also 
 used, and threw the light one hundred and forty miles 
 There were two Spanish stations Hfty n^iles apart." 
 Mulhacen, 11,420 feet high, and Tetica. 6,820 feet. The 
 
 I 1 
 
136 
 
 Triangulation. 
 
 m 
 
 two Algerian stations, 3,730 and 1,920 feet, were 66 miles 
 apart, and were each distant from Mulhacen about 170 
 miles. The labour of transporting the necessary machin- 
 ery, wood, water, &c., to such a height as Mulhacen was 
 very great. It was twenty days after everything had been 
 got ready before the first signal light was made out across 
 the sea. After that the observations were carried on un- 
 interruptedly. In France, night observations have been 
 carried on by means of a petroleum lamp placed in the 
 focus of a refracting lens of eight inches diameter. 
 
 MEASURING THE ANGLES. 
 
 Of late years the only instruments used for measuring 
 the angles of a triangulation have been theodolites of 
 various sizes ; the larger natures being really "alt-azimuth" 
 instruments. The more important and extended the sur- 
 vey the larger and more delicate are the instruments em- 
 ployed. In the great triangulation of India theodolites 
 of 18 and 36 inches diameter were used, the average 
 length of the triangle sides being about 30 miles. For the 
 Spanish-Algierian triangulation they had theodolites of 
 16 inches diameter read by four micrometers. In the 
 United States Coast Survey the large theodolites have 
 diameters of 24 and 30 inches. For the secondary and 
 tertiary triangles smaller instruments are used. The 
 method of taking the angles varies with the nature of the 
 instrument. The smaller ones have usually two verniers. 
 Those of about 8 inches diameter have three, while the 
 arcs of the larger ones are read by micrometers, of which 
 some have as many as five. In all cases errors due to 
 unequal graduation and false centreing are almost entire- 
 ly eliminated by the practice of reading all the verniers 
 or micrometers, and taking the same angles from differ- 
 ent parts of the arc. It is usual to measure all important 
 angles a large number of times. / r*,^' oi,^/./^-<'' 
 
 
 /. 
 
 ^<x:-: 
 
 l-UU./i.^ 
 
 i^'*-* -»•:■««♦''■ 
 
 •*■/- 
 
 (xxwi-tH. 
 
 i' 
 
 * X-*1->v_J_-, 
 
56 miles 
 out 170 
 machin- 
 ;en was 
 ad been 
 t across 
 ! on un- 
 .'e been 
 in the 
 
 asuring 
 lites of 
 imuth" 
 he sur- 
 ts em- 
 •dolites 
 .verage 
 "or the 
 ites of 
 In the 
 3 have 
 ry and 
 The 
 of the 
 rniers, 
 le the 
 which 
 lue to 
 jntire- 
 irniers 
 differ- 
 Drtant 
 
 'l!<,fH-V.- 
 
 
 Triangulation. 
 1 , ^Z7 
 
 Of the smaller theodolites there are two ki^^^dT^il 
 
 ticukr reading, the telescCo can be dSed ,„ "' ''"" 
 required I„ a ^eUe.atin/.heodomf le C:,X'^ 
 fixed to the stand, and when the instrument Ts set 1 ' ,nr 
 .he purpose of measuring a horizontal angk it s ' ui.e , 
 
 verniers. If an angle is read off on each and th« * i 
 Srhl""'"'^' °™' ^"'' •"= -rr;m a's ed.t 
 
 tx:zT '"^ --- ^^ '^^ saUairr Ch! 
 
 h-d.object.andclamped,!::fad"Vt r^t ;",r 
 
 Th ', f °'" '^ "6"'" =" °" 'h^ l^ft hand obtct 
 
 The lower plate ,s then clamped, the upper one set f^l 
 
 ve"rn er'ma °'\'""''"' °" ""^ right^Ldob e The 
 
 ^a-;::-r^;e:^:^tr:r-ii-- 
 a=Xti"-o--Lt<Teo^£^s 
 
 not usually give such good resul Is mighf be "m! 
 
 II 
 
T 
 
 138 
 
 Tri angulation. 
 
 TO REDUCE A MEASURED ANGLE TO THE CENTRE OF A 
 
 STATION. 
 
 It may happen than an inaccessible object — such as 
 the summit of a church spire — has to be used as an angle 
 of an important triangle. It cannot, of course, be meas- 
 ured directly, but it may be found indirectly as follows : 
 
 Let ABC be the triangle and A the inaccessible point. 
 Take a contiguous point A' and measure the angles ABC, 
 BCA, BA'C, AA'B. Calculate or otherwise obtain the 
 distance AA' on plan. 
 
 CallBAC, A; BA'C, A'; 
 ABA', a; and ACA', /9. 
 
 Now A + a=A' + /3. 
 
 Therefore A=A'+/3— a. . 
 
 Also, AB and AC are 
 known, and 
 
 (AB sin a=AA' sin AA'B 
 
 (AC sin /9=AA' sin AA'C Fig. 33. 
 
 or, since a and /9 are very small angles, if they are taken 
 in seconds, 
 
 JAB X o sin i" =AA' sin AA'B 
 (AC X /9sin i" =AA' sin AA'C 
 
 Therefore, A=:A' -"^4^^^+ ^^' ^^" ^^'C 
 
 AB sin i" 
 
 AC sin i' 
 
 CORRECTION FOR PHASE OF SIGNAL. 
 
 If the sun shines on a reflecting signal — such as a 
 polished cone, cylinder, or sphere — the point observed will, 
 in general, be on one side of the true signal, and a correc- 
 tion will have to be made in the measured angle. The 
 following is the rule in the case of a cylinder. 
 
 Let r be the radius of the base of the cylinder, Z the 
 horizontal angle at the point of observation between the 
 sun and the signal, and D the distance. 
 
 ^ 
 
Triangidation. 
 
 139 
 
 L^ 
 
 Then, the correction = ± ^ ^°^T 
 
 L 
 
 D sin i" 
 The proof is very simple. 
 
 In the case of a hemisphere the value of r will depend 
 on the sun's aUitude. If we call the latter A. r will 
 become r cos -|i , which must be substituted for r in the 
 above equation. 
 
 TO REDUCE AN INCLIMED ANGLE TO THE HORIZONTAL 
 
 PLANE. 
 
 It often h-pocns, as in 
 the case ' • gles meas- 
 ured wit:, u.e sextant or 
 - repeatinpr circle, that the 
 observed ang^le is inclined 
 to the horizontal, and a 
 reduction is necessary to 
 get the true horizontal 
 angle. In Fig. 34, let O 
 be the observer's position, 
 a and 6 the objects, andaO 6 Fig. 34. 
 
 the observed angle. If Z is the zenith, and vertical arcs 
 are drawn through a and b, meeting the horizon in A and 
 13, then A e B IS the angle required, a Z 6 is a spherical 
 triangle and by measuring the vertical angles Aa. Bb 
 we shall have its three sides, since ZA and Z B are each 
 90. Also, « Z 6.^A O B. If we call aft, A; za,.; and 
 Zb, z , we can obtain a Z b from the equation 
 
 sin ^-^= (si n js-z ) jm^-^-y^ 
 2 ( sin s sin z ] 
 
 where s = ^l±£±£' 
 2 
 
 The arcs A«, B6 are generally small, and the differ- 
 
 C^ 
 
 I'- 
 
 j; 
 
140 
 
 Triangulation. 
 
 II i 
 
 ence of z and z therefore also small. The arcs may 
 therefore be s ostituted for the sines, and we have for the 
 correction (in seconds) 
 
 AOB— /i = |go°-l±£ 
 V 2 
 
 f'tan^sini"-^^-^''" ■ ^ 
 
 2--- ( a j cot ^ sin i" 
 
 This formula is applicable when z and / are within ^° 
 of go . "^ 
 
 If one of the objects is on the horizon we shall have 
 
 AOB-/t=- - 2 {45 -^j 'cot h sin 1" 
 
 If, in additio: , the angle h is 90° the correction will be 
 ml. 
 
 THE SPHERICAL EXCESS. 
 
 The angles of a triangle measured by the theodolite 
 are those of a spherical triangle ; the reason being that at 
 each station the horizontal plate when levelled is tangen- 
 tial to the earth's surface at that point. We must 
 therefore expect to find that the three angles of a large 
 triangle, when added together, amount to more than 180- 
 and this is actually the case. The difference is called the 
 spherical excess." From spherical trigonometry we 
 know that Its amount is directly proportional to the area 
 of the triangle. In small triangles it is inappreciable. 
 An equilateral triangle of 13 miles a side would have an 
 excess of only one second. For one of 102 miles it would 
 be one minute. 
 
 Taking for granted that the spherical excesses of two 
 triangles are as their areas we can easily find the excess 
 for a triangle of area s-thus : A trirectangular triangle 
 has a surface of one-eighth that of the sphere, or -''-^', and 
 
 The excess, in seconds, 
 X v; r and s being, 
 
 its excess is go', or 324000" 
 
 will therefore be equal to ^ ^ 3^42°° 
 
 of course, in the same unit of measure 
 
 ■ 
 
■ 
 
 ■ 
 
 Triangulation. 
 141 
 
 Since s is very small compared~^^^ithT»~if^;^ 7" 
 obtained with sufficient accuracv J 7h ^ ^^ 
 
 treating the triangle as it we^e Ypl e 0^'"^" '^ 
 thus use either of the formula ^^ "^^^ 
 
 « 6 sin C 
 
 or 
 
 
 s — 
 
 «2 sin B sin C 
 
 J. 2 sin (B+C) 
 
 according to the data given 
 
 2 y2 sin i" 
 
 of "irei^LTtrrct^nr xh" '-'- ''- ^^^^^-^^^^^^^ 
 
 become ^^^ expression will then 
 
 a^ sin Cj(i-f^os^2 L) 7 
 
 2 y2 sin i''" ^ ^ 
 
 radius, and L the mean latitude of the three stations 
 
 CORRECTING THE ANGLES OP A TRIANGLE. 
 
 In practice the sum of the three measured anries of a 
 orreSd' T' ""■'' " °"«'" '° ''=' ^'^ '^^y I' ' 'o b 
 
 me u1 wifhTuairelh!" ,"'"7"'^^ "^™ """ 
 wuii equal care, the plan adopted s to -.dH t^ 
 
 spHerica, . th^ .hp^X^.e? o,;:^. '.:%:? ^^ 
 
 :ndtttwer"eTeZttE''^^Tr°""'t '? '^°-^"" 
 e greater tnan b. Then we should subtract 
 
 from each angle -Z::£_ 
 3 
 
 If some angles have been measured oftener, or with 
 greater care, than others, the amount of correction to be 
 
 z_ 
 
142 
 
 Triangulation. 
 
 L 
 
 applied to each v/ill be inversely as the weights attached 
 to the results of the measurements. 
 
 In the Spain-Algiers quadrilateral triangulation the 
 spherical excesses of th6 four triangles were 
 43".5o ; 6o".7 ; 7o".73 ; 54".i6 
 and the errors of the sums of the observed angles were 
 +o".i8 -o".54 +i'.84 +i".i2 
 
 CALCULATING THE SIDES OF THE TRIANGLES. 
 
 The next step is the calculation of the sides of the 
 triangles. Treating the latter as spherical this may be 
 done in three ways. 
 
 1. Using the ordinary formulas of spherical trigonome- 
 try. This is a very laborious method, and others which 
 are simpler give equally good results. 
 
 2. Delambre's method. This consists in taking ^he 
 chords of the sides, calculating the angles they make 
 with each other, and solving the plane triangle thus found. 
 To reduce an arc a to its chord we have 
 
 Chord=2 sin J a 
 
 or, if the arc be in terms of the radius. 
 
 Chord=a — -^^ -* 
 
 The angles made by the chords are obtained by a well- 
 known problem in spherical trigonometry. 
 
 3rd method, by Legendre's Theorem ; which is, that in 
 any spherical triangle, the sides of which are very small 
 compared to the radius of the sphere, if each of the 
 angles be diminished by one-third of the spherical excess, 
 the sines of these angles will be proportional to the 
 lengths of the opposite sides; and the triangle may 
 therefore be calculated as if it were a plane one. 
 
 All three methods were used in the French surveys. In 
 the British Ordnance survey the triangles were generally 
 
 ■ 
 
well- 
 
 Triangulation. 
 
 cakulated by the second method and checke^^T^ 
 Legendre's theorem gives very nearly accurate results 
 
 The following investigatiru shows under what circum- 
 stances small errors in the measurements of the anTe^f 
 
 ^.:^^jt ''-' *^' "- '"» -='-/ 
 
 Suppose that in a triangle r. b c we have the side b as a 
 measured base, and measure the angles A and C ; we have 
 a sin B=b sin A 
 
 If we suppose b to have been correctly measured we 
 -ay treat ,t as a constant; and under this supposhil 
 If we differentiate the above equation we shall get 
 
 , 6 cos A , . 
 
 a cos B , „ 
 
 or, since —^ 
 
 sm B 
 
 sin B 
 
 a 
 
 sin A 
 rffl=a cot A d A~a cot B i B 
 
 ^ A and ^ B are here supposed to be positive and 
 represent small errors in the n.easurements'0 A a^d B 
 
 shill h '''r:r^ ^° ^^ ^^-^l and of the same sign we 
 shall have for the error of the side a, 
 
 da=a d A (cot A— cot B) 
 which becomes zero when A=B 
 
 sJs,?.rhaii''h!v:"=^"^^''=^'''='"'^' '>■" °' °pp-'- 
 
 du'^ ±ad k (cot A + cot B^ 
 and smce ' 
 
 sin (A + B) 
 
 cot A+cot B=ii5LiA + Bl 
 sm A sin B 
 
 f^osTA^=BP-JE5F(ATB) 
 
 ', 
 
144 
 
 Triangulation. 
 
 it follows that 
 
 da= ± ad A- 
 
 2 sin C 
 
 cos (A — B) -(• cos C 
 and da will be a minimum when A"=-B. 
 
 In either case we have the result that the best con- 
 ditioned triangle is the equilateral. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 w i 
 
 ■J 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
;st con- 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 DETERMINATION OF THE GEODETIC LATITUDES LONOI 
 
 TUDES, AND AZIMUTHS OF THE STATIONS OF A 
 
 TRIANOULATION, TAKING INTO ACCOUNT 
 
 THE ELLIPTICITY OF THE EARTH 
 
 Where the lengths of all the sides of a triangulation 
 have been computed it becomes necessary, in order to 
 plot the positions of the' stations on the chart, to obtain 
 their latitudes and longitudes. 
 
 The first step to be taken is to determine by means of 
 astronomical observations the true position of one of the 
 stations, and also the azimuth of one of the sides leading 
 from it. We can then, knowing the lengths of all the 
 sides of the triangles and the angles they make with each 
 other, deduce the azimuths of all the sides, and calculate 
 the latitudes and longitudes of the other stations. 
 
 Before geodetical operations had been carried to the 
 perfection they have now attained it was considered suf- 
 ficient to solve this problem by the ordinary formulae of 
 spherical trigonometry, taking as the radius of the earth 
 the radius at the mean latitude of the chain of triangles 
 
/ 
 
 L 
 
 146 
 
 Geodetic Latitudes, 6-c. 
 
 Thus in the triangle PAA' 
 
 (fig- 35) where P is the 
 
 pole of the earth, and A, 
 
 A', two stations, if the 
 
 latitude and longitude of 
 
 A were known, and also 
 
 the ler.jth and azimuth of 
 
 A A', we should havo tin- 
 
 two sides A P, A A', and 
 
 the included angle PAA', 
 
 and could use Napier's .^j,,^ ^^ 
 
 analogies to determine the remaining parts of the triangle 
 and thus obtain the latitude and longitude of A', and the 
 azimuth of A at A'. But this method is deficient in 
 exactness, especially as regards the latitude, and the fol- 
 lowing has been adopted as giving better results. 
 
 Let A N be the normal at A, and suppose a sphere to 
 be described with centre N and radius N A meeting the 
 polar axis at^. Also let p A, p A' be meridians on this 
 sphere. We then calculate the geographicr.l position of 
 A , not by the ordinary formulas of spherical trigonometry 
 (since the side A A' is very small relatively)" but by the 
 series 
 
 I. a-^b—c cos A+J c2 cot b sin»*'A 
 +J c3 cos A sin2 A (J+cot2 b)+... 
 
 II. i8o°— B—A + c sin A cot b 
 4- ^ c2 sin A cos A (i + 2 cotj" b) 
 + i c« sin A cos2 A cot 6 (3 + 4 cot^ b) 
 — J-c' sin A cot b (1 + 2 cot2 b)... 
 
 III. C= 
 
 'sif6'^"^+srrh'^"-^^°^Acot6 
 
 '^i^b ^^" ^ ^°^' ^ (I + 4 cot2 /;)_i _li sin A cot^ b... 
 
 sin 
 
 
 V 
 
 C^^ 
 
 n . 
 
 ■ 
 
 y. iif<i 
 
liaiigle, 
 ind the 
 ient in 
 the fol- 
 
 here to 
 ing the 
 an this 
 tion of 
 ometry 
 by the 
 
 J9 \\\ 
 
 Jt^i... 
 
 Geodetic Latitudes, &c. 
 
 H7 
 
 Let L be the latitude of A 
 
 M be the longitude of A —A Pa 
 " ^^' " " A'-A'Pfl 
 
 Let AA'» K, and let Z and Z' be the angles it makes 
 with the meridians /A and M', respectively. Then, sub- 
 st.tutmg this notation in the sph- al triangL' ABC. and 
 expressmg by u the value of K in cernis of the radius, we 
 have 
 
 « — 90" — L 6 = go _ L 
 
 ^ ^ Z B =^180°— Z' 
 
 '^ - " C = M' — M 
 
 which would be the values to introduce.intc. the series 
 I,n,m^; but m practice it is mn^^f^^oniont to count 
 the- a;mru.ths from o to j6o°, starting at the south and 
 go.ng round by the west, north, and east. TiH^k^ Z L 
 the azunuth of A' at A, and Z' the azimuth of A at A' 
 IhcMx4efe-in Fig. 35 V=i8o-Z, and ¥'=360 -Z' and 
 the series I, 111,111 will be changed respectively into 
 
 (a) 
 
 ^ ~"L— w cos Z— ^ u2 sin i" sin^ Z tan L 
 
 -i «2 oS., ," • rj tan L 
 t u^ sin I sm 2 Z— 
 
 M'-M-f 
 
 sin Z 
 
 cos L 
 
 cos L 
 Z'—iSo' + Z— K sin Z tan L 
 +i M2 sin i" sin 2 Z (1 + 2 tan^ L) 
 the arc u being supposed to be in seconds. 
 
 -ii-*om«ti4fies-bappe«s-th*t-Ilie latitude L' is not quite 
 the true latitude of A'; for the latter is A' N' Q.' or the 
 angle made by the normal A' N' with N' Q' vvhile the 
 latitude given by equation (a) is the angle A' N Q The 
 correction of the latitude {</') is the angle N A' N'- for 
 A 'x\g-A 'N 'Q '=A 'RQ '-A 'N 'Q '=N 'A 'R 
 
 andsins^=-N-Nls'"-PJij^' 
 
 :' V . . N' A' 
 
 ****f n n , inv G cti4itttiug the exact value of this angle it 
 should be noted that when the geodesic line K is more 
 

 I 
 
 i-t« 
 
 Geodetic Latitudes, Sc. 
 
 "^■5 
 
 than half a decree its amplitude in latitude on the sphere 
 — '■ y (/L — becomes a dilforent (]uantity — say aL — on 
 the ellipsoid, and that these two amplitudes of arc^s of 
 the same length being inversely proportional to their radii 
 of curvature N, R, we have 
 
 A L : rfL::N : R::i : - ' "fL 
 
 I — c' sm'' L 
 whence we have, very nearly 
 
 A L--i L (i+c" COS* L), and consequently 
 i}^^d L c* cos2 L 
 and therefore the corrected latitude L' is 
 (fl')L'— L— (»cosZ + 1j(2 sin I'sin^Ztaii L)(i+e» cos'L) 
 and we have in seconds, 
 
 ™ K (I— g ' sin 2 L) \ _^ K 
 
 tf sin i" N~sin i" 
 
 The formulas (6) and (c) are not ordinarily used, for when 
 the latitude L is known on the spheroid it is used to de- 
 termine M' and Z' . But in this case we must introduce 
 L' into the values of these two unknown quantities. Now 
 we have the spherical triangle/) A A', giving 
 
 /»*' Tk*\ sin %i sin Z 
 
 sm (M — m)= :r-i — 
 
 cos L 
 
 and, since u is very small 
 
 ^ cos L 
 
 Also, in the same triangle 
 
 cot \ (A + A')=tan \ (M'-M)^-^" ,*-.^J^J^2 
 
 cos J (L — L) 
 
 . A + A') 
 
 2 I ■ 
 
 but 90° — and M 
 
 ■tan \ go' 
 -M being 
 
 always very small angles, and A + A' being the same as 
 Z' — Z, we have 
 
 sini(L + L') ' '' 
 
 v--- 
 
 (c') 2'=i8o° + Z— (M'— M) 
 
 cos \ (L— L'y 
 
 't-tv, 
 
 /i<>- f 
 
 6t. 
 
 ^-r 
 
 ■Vij Lt-, 
 
 / 
 
 f 
 
 -1l^ 
 
/ 
 
 f 
 
 Geodetic Latitudes, S-c. 
 
 149 
 
 The imaginary sphere used in the above investigation 
 will, of course, coincide with the spheroid for the parallel 
 of latitude through the point A. Any plane passing 
 through the normal will cut the surface of the sphere in 
 the arc of a great circle, and the spheroid in a line, which, 
 for about three degrees, will be practically a geodesic 
 line. 
 
 The following is another way oi treating the sub- 
 ject. Instead of taking the n jruial at ne of the points 
 A A' as the radius of the imagi-iurv sph.re let us take the 
 normal at the point B, mid-way v^■ee.n them, as in I-i.r. 
 
 36, and for the sake 
 
 of simplicity let these 
 points be on the same 
 meridian. Let A N, 
 A' N' be the normals 
 at A A', produce them 
 to Z and Z' respec- 
 tively, and draw A c, 
 A' e parallel to the 
 major axisOE. 
 The astronomical lati" 
 tudesof the two points 
 are Z A e, Z' A' e. If 
 now we draw B C the 
 
 normal at B, C will fall between N and N'. The curve 
 given in the figure is the elliptical meridian. The circular 
 curve drawn with radius C B is not shown ; but it would 
 pass a little outside of A and A'. For practical purposes 
 we may suppose it to pass through those points. Join 
 C A, C A', and produce them to s and z respectively. 
 2Ae,zA'e' will be the latitudes of A and A' on the 
 imagmary sphere, one being less and the other greater 
 than the latitudes on the spheroid. The differences 
 ZAs!,Z.Az may be considered the same. Let each be 
 
 c 
 
 I , 
 
 ^-n^-u^^j^ ^ 
 
 f^-V^ 
 
 / i-6 
 
 J 
 
^srsSBESwa 
 
 i 
 
 150 
 
 Geodetic Latitudes, 6-c. 
 
 3 
 
 designated--. Let L and L' be the astronomical lati- 
 tudes of A and A', /. and /' their latitudes on the sphere, 
 and X the latitude of B. Then <J=L—L'— (/-/') 
 
 3 L + L' /+/' 
 ^^~ — or-— , and 
 
 JzzL^^ ra dius of c urvature at B 
 L— L ^ normal at B " 
 
 AlsOj^-^-,-=-j__^,_ ^ 
 therefore 
 
 I — e^ 
 
 I — e^ sin2 X 
 
 I 
 1 + ^2 COS2 /. 
 
 L— L— (J= - 
 
 L— L' 
 
 1+^2 COS2 X 
 
 and ^=(L— L') j 1 i_ __) 
 
 ( 1+^2 COS2 ; / 
 
 = (L-L') -^i^?!LL_ 
 
 1+^2 COS2 yl 
 
 '^(^—L) ez COS2 ;, nearly. 
 
 The angle .J is therefore nearly the same as the correc 
 tion </> already investigated. 
 
 In what next follows K is the distance A A' in yards 
 of any two stations A, A', u the same distance in seconds 
 ot arc K the radms of curvature of the meridian, N the 
 normal (both in yards), e the eccentricity (=0.0817), and 
 a the equatorial radius. 
 
 Equation («') gives us the values of wand V, (V) ^ives 
 us M . and (c) gives Z'. If we neglect the denominato 
 of the fraction in (c) we have 
 
 2'=i8o- + Z— (M'— M)sini(L + L') ' 
 
 or Z'^i%d' + z- 
 
 u sin Z . , 
 -^^^,smnL + L') 
 
 The last term of this equation, which is the difference 
 
 t^::::^:''''' ^^^ ""^^"^' '- ^'^ —genceof. 
 
 ■ ■ . cU,.- 
 
 ^•f-'^i- 
 
 
 ■tr: 
 
 / :^a > 
 
 
 / / i v . - 
 
 ^yr ,. 
 
 r.^.^. I/H-Al' ••■. 
 
 ■^v<.yu^ 
 
 - ( M ' - /ii/ -:...vx 
 
 
 C : 7.. ., .- 
 
 J 
 
 I 
 
srence 
 
 nee of r-^'"^" ^^"^ 
 
 ■ ■ ■ d 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 J 
 
 _^Geodetic^atitudes, &c. '■ 
 
 If the triangnlation is limited^hT^^^i^i^Tr^T 
 convenient to express L' Af n ^^. '^ '"^y ^^ "^ore 
 
 lar co-ordinates re eld' to axes ha " " 'r^ °' "^^^"^"■ 
 station A. the axis of/b h.rthe '?• '' °"^'" ''^'^^ 
 axis of .the freodesic-'line iourr'^'" '' ^' ^"^ ^^^ 
 to the meridian.The equations are ' P-P^-^icuIar 
 
 L'= 
 
 '^Rsinr-^-^iNsHTr" 
 
 M'=M± ^- 
 
 N sin I" 
 
 tan fL± — ^_ ) 
 ^ ^Rsini'V 
 
 X 
 
 cosL' 
 
 tan L'* 
 
 N sin i" 
 "=edi„ the next three probkms! ' '"" ''^ "»^.*« 
 
 THE LINE JOINING THEM DIRECTION OF 
 
 Here we have eiven T r ' »* 
 Lan<lL'weobtai„T ' ' ""'' *''• ^-"i *»"> 
 
 W« have then to fl„d^/ and /'from the equations 
 ^"~L and /'=-L'+~^ 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 ^icuIartothe^eHdiathLn^h^olh^tin-''^-''^-'- 
 
 Let y be the number of secondQ in f k 
 ".eridian het.een L and CZlu^^Z^::"' 
 
 pointy ' from 1. ^ ' ^ ^^*^^ ^^''""th of the 
 
 .:: .1 
 
 ^--o 
 
 <^' 
 
 
 I-IATH^ 
 
 
 ,/^ //'; 
 
_;,2i-^«='5— i-Stess;:^:' 
 
 1 
 
 152 
 
 Geodetic Latittides, &c. 
 
 Then we shall have 
 
 .V'-=-(M'— M)cos/' 
 j"— =/ — /' — \ sin i" x-i" tan / 
 x=~x N sin I" 
 ^_jy" N sin I" 
 
 tan Z= — 
 
 M = 
 
 sin Z cos Z 
 
 K=-w* N sin I" 
 
 The signs of (L — L') and of (/ — /') must be carefully at- 
 tended to. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 ' 
 
 \t 
 
 Given ' 
 
 L=49« 4' 25" 
 L'=49 22 33 
 M' — M, or difference of longitude— 38' 47"=2327* 
 to find Z and K 
 
 Here L + L'-=98° 26' 58" 
 A ^ ^ (L+L)=49 13 29 
 L'— L-» o 18 8 
 i(L'— L)=o 9 4=544' 
 
 » 
 
 To find the value of — 
 
 2 
 
 log £2—7.81085 
 
 log \ (L— L)=2.73549 
 
 2 log cos HL + LV 0.62994 
 
 Jog — —0.17628 
 2 ^ 
 
 Z— L- 
 
 =49° 4' 26".5 (5 being negative) 
 
 5 
 
 /'=L'+ ^-=4q°22'3i".5 
 
1 
 
 
 irefully at- 
 
 =2327* 
 
 ;ive) 
 
 Geodetic Latitudes, &c. 
 To find x" 
 
 Log (M'-M) =3.3668785 
 log cos //= 9.8136470 
 
 Jo&^:=3.i8o5255 
 X =1515" 
 
 To find the value of the 2nd term oiy" 
 
 log i sin 1 "=4.38454 
 
 2 log a;' =6.36105 
 log tan /=o.o6ig7 
 
 log 2nd term=o.8o756 
 
 2nd term»=o° o' 6" 
 /'-/ -=0 18 5 
 
 :v'=o 18 IlcsrIOgi" 
 
 To find the azimuth Z 
 
 Log a;"=3. 1805255 
 
 logy'=3.o378887 
 
 Jog" -V =0.1426368 
 
 ^=125° 45' 21" 
 To find log N sin 1" 
 
 Log N (in yards)=6.8443224 
 log sin i"=4.6855749 
 
 Log N sin I "=1.5298973 
 To find log u" 
 
 Logj/';=3.o378887 
 iog cos ^=9.7666596 
 
 To find k'"^'''^^-'''"'' 
 
 log «"=3.27I229I 
 
 logNsini"=i.5298973 
 
 4.8011264 
 J^= 63226 yards. 
 
 
 I 
 
 •if 
 
\t 
 
 154 
 
 Geodetic Latitudes, &c. 
 
 ' 
 
 To find the co-ordinates. 
 
 Value of X. 
 
 Log a'=3. 1805255 
 log N sin i"= 1.5298973. 
 
 log x=\'yio^?'i% 
 ^=51336 yards 
 
 Value of y. 
 
 Logy;=3.o378887 
 log N sin i"=i. 5298973 
 
 log ^=-4.5677860 
 J' =36965 yards 
 
 TO COMPUTE THE DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO POINTS, 
 KNOWING THEIR LATITUDES AND THE A2IMUTH OF 
 ONE FROM THE OTHER. 
 
 Let L and L' be the latitudes, Z the azimuth, and let^ ■^'^ 
 
 <, >->- 
 
 
 
 
 Then we sh.j.\\ have, as before 
 
 J- = g ^ (L— L ') col'; 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 N= 
 
 ,0 
 
 2 
 
 (i— e2 sin3 /l)J 
 
 /'=L'H- 
 
 «? 
 
 Assume 
 
 tan / ^ 
 
 cos 
 
 ,, . , „, sm / . -^ 
 
 then, sm (<p — « )—- ^ — :-sm v* 
 '^ sm / ^ 
 
 which gives «; and K-=-«" N sin 1" 
 
 The algebraic sign of cos Z will determine the sign of f, 
 and, consequently, whether u" is to be added to or sub- 
 tracted from <f. 
 
 Example — 
 
 L= 49» 4' 25" N 
 L'— 49 22 33 N 
 Z = 125 45 21 
 
 Here, as in the last example, we find d, and hence 
 
 =49 4 27 
 /'=49 22 32 
 
 it* 
 
[78887 
 598973 
 
 177860 
 yards 
 
 OINTS, 
 PH OF 
 
 
 ^^{.•iv 
 
 sub- 
 
 Geodetic Latitudes, &c. 
 
 155 
 
 To find the value of f. 
 log tan /=o.o6i9727 
 log cos 2=9.7666566 
 
 log tan f =0.2953161 
 
 To find <p — u. 
 
 log sin 9'=9-9503895 
 
 log sin /'-g.8802377 
 
 co-log sin /=o.i2i7320 
 
 log sin (^-«) =9-9523592 
 
 ^~^=:-(63°39'3") 
 «=o° 31' 8"= 1868' 
 
 eifaS yard's! "'""'°" "^'""^ ™ '" "<= ""d K to be 
 
 Using the same nomenclature as before, let L be the 
 gtven latitude and ,n the difference of the longitudes: 
 Take L"=L' + ^ 
 Assume tan ^=sin L tan Z 
 tan L''=taiLLsiii^-w) 
 
 2 . -i _^ 
 
 2 
 
 ^ W COS^/ 
 
 sin Z 
 
 ^. 
 
 'i-<^ 
 
 «« 
 
 K=?r N sin I" 
 
 The algebraic sign of tan Zwfll determine the sign of ,, 
 fshtd bTr""" ""^'"^^ " '^ •" "^ '"---^ - "-'n 
 Example-— 
 
 Let L= 49° 4' 25'/ N 
 2=125 45 21 
 w^=38' 47"=2327" 
 
 *% 
 

 156 
 
 Geodetic LatUudes, &c. 
 
 To find y>. 
 
 log sin L=9.8782652 
 log tan Z=o.i426358 
 
 log tan ^=0.0209020 
 f =— (46° 22' 42") 
 ^— 38 47 
 
 To find L" 
 
 log tan L=o.o6i9663 
 
 log sin (f—;ji) =9.8643024 
 
 co-log sin 0-0.1463154 
 
 iog tan L' -0.0665841 
 
 - ig" 2 ^ 30 
 
 yj — w— 47* I' 29" 
 To find t? 
 
 L 
 
 49 4 25 
 49 2-z 30 
 
 L-L"=— 18' 5 "=1085" 
 L+L"=98 2655 
 
 log c» ^.7.81085 
 
 log(L— L")=3.0353i 
 
 2 log cos \ (L+L'0=9.62994 
 
 log ^=0.47610 
 8= -3" 
 
 L'_L"-^=49°22'33" 
 
 =49° 4' 26/'.5 
 
 /'=L'- 
 
 d 
 
 =49 22 31 .5 
 
 ;■ ! 
 
 i^ 
 
 To find u" and K — 
 
 log ^=3.3668785 
 
 log cos /--g.8136471 
 
 co-log sin Z—0.0907036 
 
 log m"'=3.27I2292 
 
 log N sin i'/==-i.5298973 
 
 log K- , >ii265 
 K^^L.3^26 yards. 
 
• 
 
 G<^odetic latitudes, &c. 
 
 On the North American boui^d^i^rVev "irTTs^Tr 
 following method was omploved in\lT2 '^^ ^^^ 
 
 muths of two distant noinV I , ^ *^^ """^"^^ ^zi- 
 of which were known.' '' ^'^'^"'^^ ^"^ ^-^'^"^es 
 
 noJjLlrndPthUl/^^Tr'-r' °^ -^-^ B is the 
 sphere, we have in Ihe s^h T' '''"'^"^ *^^ ^^'"^h as a 
 
 sides PA, PBfanVtLTnrA pTef "^^J^^ ^^ 
 find the angles A B Th; J^ ^'''^"' ''"^ have to 
 
 g'es A, B. This IS done by the usual for^I^, 
 
 tan A (A+B)-^ 
 
 cos 
 
 AP-BP 
 
 
 cos 
 
 . AP-BP 
 sm — tif 
 
 tan \ (B-A)-z. ___^ v o . P 
 
 . AP+BP "^^^^a 
 sm ^— - 2 
 
 2 
 
 which give -^ilB and fc^ 
 
 2 2 
 
 Then,A=^B_B-A 
 
 2 2 
 
 B=A±B B-A 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 «, /?, from the formul ' ' "' ''^'"'^^^ *^^ ^"^^^ 
 
 sin a= 
 
 sin AP 
 
 sin /?= 
 
 sin BP 
 
 ^75 -'- 4/--^ 
 
 '' tln'/^o"-;' ^' ^^^ *^^ *-^ spheroidal azimuths, 
 igo —A )-=cos a tan (go'-A) 
 
 tan(B'-go")=cos^tan(B-9o°) 
 
 cut'^from'oXfntT ^'T t^" ^ ^°"^ ''^ ^^ ^« ^^ / 
 one point to another through forests. ^ 
 
 L 
 
 I 
 
p 
 
 158 
 
 Geodetic Latitudes, &c. 
 
 To find the accurate length of the arc on the surface of 
 the earth between two very distant points of known lati- 
 tude and longitude is a very difficult and not very useful 
 problem. It is, however, often advisable to calculate the 
 distances between stations that are within the limits of 
 triangulation, as a check upon the geodesical operations ; 
 and in the case of an extended line of coast, or in a wild 
 and difficult country where triangulation is impossible, 
 this problem is most useful for the purpose of laying down 
 upon paper a number of fixed points from which to carry 
 on a survey. 
 
 In the triangle PAB mentioned in the last article we 
 have, as before, the sides PA, PB, and the angle P, as 
 data. By solving the triangle we obtain the length of the 
 arc AB. If the azimuths can be observed at the two 
 stations the accuracy of the result will be greatly increas- 
 ed, and we can obtain the difference of longitude of the 
 two stations as follows : — It may be proved that the sphe- 
 rical excess in a spheroidal triangle is equal to that in a 
 spherical triangle whose vertices have the same astrono- 
 mical latitude and the same differences of longitude : 
 from whence results the rule 
 PA-PB 
 
 A+B 
 
 , P 
 
 tan — = 
 2 
 
 cos- 
 
 cos- 
 
 PA + PB 
 
 X cot 
 
 cos ^ diff. lat. 
 
 xcot 
 
 A+B 
 
 sin J sum of lat. 
 which gives P, or the difference of longitude. 
 
 As a rule, a small error in the latitudes is of no import- 
 ance unless the latitudes are small : but the azimuths 
 must be observed with the greatest accuracy. The angle 
 P being known we can get the length of the arc AB, and 
 must then convert it into distance on the earth's surface, 
 using the radius of curvature of the arc for the mean lati- 
 tude. 
 
surface of 
 lown lati- 
 ery useful 
 culate the 
 ! limits of 
 lerations ; 
 in a wild 
 npossible, 
 ^ing down 
 ii to carry 
 
 irticle we 
 igle P, as 
 gth of the 
 : the two 
 y increas- 
 de of the 
 the sphe- 
 that in a 
 astrono- 
 )ngitude : 
 
 Devillc's Methods. 
 
 o import- 
 azimuths 
 rhe angle 
 AB, and 
 ; surface, 
 aean lati- 
 
 , 
 
 to only a few inches in loo miles ^' ''™°""" 
 
 of solving certatan„M °'"';™"'^ ^'"P'" "^'hods 
 tables of Lrrhmsofl^."' '" "^'"""^ ""^ "'^''"^ °f 
 
 the distance ot oi„f I. J ^0?:;:: ^Tr 'ot°/ "T" 
 
 oT.ts.'.rt- i^ r T 4-™^^^^^^^ 
 
 A and B wil, be. pra^iXls^^i^TSr^r" 
 
 .a"n7fre:s I'e^xi^i':-' rr='^- <'■^- 
 
 less than 90' by ha f thecnnv " '^ """^ '^ "'" ^^ 
 
 constant the conve I "ce will f "" " "" *='^"« ^ 
 the equator (where ttk„rh- ? "' "" ''"'^^ f"™ 
 
 problems involv S^ Vo station^' ' fT^^ "", ""'^^^ '" 
 convergencensed ,! .. f<?.r:e:?reri:tt^^ 
 
 by fo^riZ!" Tn'the'f'ir'"'™ '"'''"^ -"-^ -■■^«' ™' 
 
 thepLipie:„iy'::f:j:rciLtSd."-^'™^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 z:.^*^ '4 
 
ir'i 
 
 1 60 
 
 DeviHr\ hfdhods. 
 
 Prob. I. — To find the con-,. agcnceot meridians between 
 two points of given latitude. 
 
 Here we have only to find by a traverse table the de- 
 parture in chains and multiply it by the convergence for 
 one chain for the mean latitude. 
 
 Prob. 2. —To refer to the meridian of a point B an 
 azimuth reckoned from the meridian of another point A. 
 
 Calculate the convergence between the two points, and 
 add or suMract it from the given azimuth according as B 
 is east or west of A. 
 
 Prob. 3.— Given the latitude and longitude of a station 
 A, and the azimuth and distance of another station B, to 
 find the latitude ;ind longitude of the latter. 
 
 The distance and azimuth being giveM we can find the 
 departure and distance in latitude of B approximately by 
 the traverse table, and have the approximate mean lati- 
 tude. We next l..id the mean azimuth by multiplying 
 the departure by the convergence for one chain at the 
 nriean latitude, and applying the convergence thus ob- 
 ained to the azimuth of B at A, which gives the azimuth 
 of A at B, and hence the mean azimuth. 
 
 To get the correct In^-'tude of B we aultiply the dis- 
 tance by the cosine of t» mean azimutii and by the value 
 of one chain in seconds of latitude. This gives the differ- 
 erence of latitude of the t-. - tations in second?. 
 
 Similarly, the difference of longitude 01 ihe stations is 
 found by multiplying the distance by the p- . of the mean 
 azimuth and by the value of one ' hain 'n seconds of 
 longitude. 
 
 Prob. 4.— To correct a traverse i the ^un' s azimuth. 
 
 On a traverse survey of any extent the direction of the 
 lines must be corrected from time to time by astronomi- 
 cal observations, usually either of the sun or the pole star. 
 
 1 
 
 ■ 
 
Deville's Methods. 
 
 , 
 
 If the traverse is commencod at a station A JiTiT""! 
 
 be equally d.stnbu.ed among the cour.es CSn.i" t 
 a westerly direction, A. station H, or the e„d of X /h 
 
 ^ui:erti:ttxts:r-^^'"-^'-='^ 
 
 rerUv rnn f I , ■ ^ ' *"® tfaverse had been cor- 
 
 267* Ji' 50' 
 49 5 
 
 268 055 
 267 59 10 
 
 M5 
 
 have been the same as the plate 
 readiP': but the latter was i' 45" 
 tooliuie. O ■ seventh of this, 
 or 15", is th( rection for each' 
 course, and we nave to add 15" 
 to the plate reading of the fir^st 
 
 course, 30" to that of the second, 
 and so on. 
 
 Unless the line is a north and co„fK 
 Ji" be continually chan At^plt" " 'poi^rTts 
 direction can he checlied at anv time 1,„ fil- " 
 
 niuth astronomically to ascertain fthis'isXf,-,"' "t" 
 to be after allowing for the convergence Thet ^^ 
 .0 find the approximate difference of a.Lde fro n'fh" 
 
 ed. Th,s w,ll g,va the latituae of the station l^d 
 
 
ptp" 
 
 \ 
 
 162 
 
 Deville's Methods. 
 
 the mean latitude approximately. The latter being 
 known, the azimuth an ' distance give the convergence, 
 which being applied to the initial azimuth the true azi- 
 muth is obtained. 
 
 Prob. 6.— To lay out a given figure on the ground, cor- 
 recting the courses by astronomical observations. 
 
 Take as an instance a square ABCD, the side AB 
 being commenced at A with a given azimuth. The course 
 is to be corrected by observations at the other three corners. 
 The convergence between A and B being found in the 
 usual manner and applied to the original azimuth (in 
 addition to the angle rit the corner) gives us the azimuth 
 of BC. Similarly, the convergence between A and C will 
 give us the azimuth of CD ; and so on. 
 
 Prob. 7. — To lay out a parallel of latitude by chords of 
 a given length. 
 
 The angle of deflection between two chords is the con- 
 vergence of meridians for the length of a chord, and the 
 azimuths will be go° minus half the convergence and 270* 
 plus half the convergence. The convergence is found in 
 the usual way. 
 
 Prob. 8.— To lay out a parallel of latitude by offsets. 
 
 A parallel may be laid out by running a line perpendicu- 
 lar to a meridian and measuring offsets towards the near- 
 est pole. The length of an offset is its distance from the 
 meridian multiplied by the sine of half the convergence 
 for that distance; or (since the distance is in this case the 
 same as the departure) the square of the distance multi- 
 plied by the sine of half the convergence for one chain. 
 As this angle is small the logarithm of its sine is ob- 
 tained by adding the logarithm of the sine of half a second 
 to the logarithm of the convergence for one chain de- 
 parture. * 
 
 i 
 
 When the offsets are equidistant any one of them may 
 
 
 %^J 
 
:er being 
 
 ivergence, 
 
 true azi- 
 
 und, cor- 
 
 s, 
 
 side AB 
 he course 
 e corners, 
 id in the 
 muth (in 
 ; azimuth 
 nd C will 
 
 :hords of 
 
 the con- 
 and the 
 and 270* 
 found in 
 
 jffsets. 
 
 ■pendicu- 
 the near- 
 from the 
 vergence 
 case the 
 ce niulti- 
 le chain, 
 e is ob- 
 a second 
 hain de- 
 
 lem may 
 
 DevilU's Methods. 
 
 163 
 
 be obtained by multiplying the first one by the squli^f 
 the nnmber of the offset. j h »i 
 
 It is almost superfluous to point out that in practice all 
 these problems are worked out by means of logarithms. 
 
 TO FIND THE AREA OF A PORTION OF THE SURFArP ni. 
 A SPHERE BOUNDED BV TWO PARAU ELS OF Lt," 
 TUDES AND TWO MERIDIANS (SPHERICAL SOLUTION.) 
 
 Let AB and CD be the meridians and AC, BD the 
 parallels. Let if be the latitude of A, <p' of B and n the 
 ditterence of longitude of the meridians. 
 
 Now the area of 
 the whole portion 
 of the surface com- 
 prised between two 
 parallels is equal to 
 the area of the por- 
 tion of the circum- 
 scribing cylinder 
 
 '^'S- 37- 
 
 (the axis of which is the polar axis) contained between 
 the planes of the parallels produced to meet it. {Vide 
 
 second figure showing a section, in which a is the point A 
 
 and 6 the point B.) 
 
 Let r be the radius of the sphere and h the perpendicu- 
 lar distance between the planes. 
 
 Then the area of the spherical zone will be 
 
 27: rxh 
 
 ~2Tr rxr (sin f '- -sin f) 
 
 =—2 7T r^ (sin (p'—.AXi <p) 
 
 :. the area of the portion between the two meridians 
 will be 
 
 ^^^i , . . . , 
 ~ 180 ^^^'" ^ ~^'" f^ 
 
..-par- 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 164 
 
 Offsets to a Parallel. 
 
 TO FIND THE OFFSETS TO A PARALLEL OF LATITUDE. 
 
 Let PA, PBC, be meridians, AB 
 a portion of the parallel, AC a por- 
 tion of a great circle touching the 
 parallel at A. 
 
 It is required at a given latitude to 
 find the offset BC for a given dis- 
 tance AC. 
 
 Let X be the circular measure of AC 
 ^o. do. BC 
 
 do. 
 
 Fig. 3«. 
 
 y 
 " I 
 
 do. PA 
 
 AC and BC are very small. 
 
 In triangle PCA we have cos PC=cos I cos x 
 
 =cos / (i— 
 
 ) nearly, 
 
 Therefore cos /—cos PC=cos /~ 
 
 2 
 
 ■ l+PC . BC 
 or 2 sm— !— - sin — - 
 2 2 
 
 -cos l- 
 
 or 2 sin /-^^'^cos/, nearly, 
 therefore, ^=^ a?" cot /. 
 (or, if a; and j' are measured lengths, and R is the radius 
 of the earth, j>/==-^ cot/) 
 
 2 K 
 
 Next join AB by a great Circle arc. The angle BAC will 
 be half the convergence, and AB=AC, approximately. 
 Draw PD bisectmg P, and therefore at right angles to AB. 
 In the triangle APD we have D— 90* 
 
 converg ence 
 2 
 
 and rAD'='9o' 
 
i 
 
 ' 
 
 Offsetts to a Parallel. 
 
 Therefore, cos PAD=tan AD cotT 
 
 or sin^^^— I^"^^ _ a t 
 
 2 -^AD cot /, approximately 
 
 =J X cot / „ 
 
 Therefore, j;=^,y2 cot /— .v sin ^5BX51?2£5 
 
 2 
 
 This is equally true if .r and ^ are measured lengths. 
 
 165 
 
i 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 METHODS OF DELINEATING A SPHERICAL SURFACE ON A 
 
 PLANE. 
 
 Since the surface of the globe is spherical, and as the 
 surface of a sphere cannot be rolled out flat, like that of 
 a cone, it is evident that maps of any large tract of coun- 
 try drawn on a flat sheet of paper cannot be made to ex- 
 actly represent the relative position of the various points. 
 It is necessary, therefore, to resort to some device in order 
 that the'points on the map may have as nearly as possible 
 the same relative position to each other as the corres- 
 ponding points on the earth's surface. 
 
 One method is to represent the points and lines of the 
 sphere according to the rules of perspective, or as they 
 would appear to the eye at some particular position with 
 reference to the sphere and the plane of projection. 
 Such a method is called z. projection. The principal pro- 
 jections of the sphere are the "orthographic," "stereo- 
 graphic," "central or gnomonic" and "globular." 
 
 A second method is to lay down the points on the map 
 according to some assumed mathematical law, the con- 
 dition to be fulfilled being that the parts of the spherical 
 surface to be represented, and their representations on the 
 map, shall be similar in their small elements. To this 
 
 ^Wk- 
 
Projections. 
 
 167 
 
 class belongs Mercator^s Projection, in which the meridians 
 are represented by equi-distant parallel straight line "d 
 the paralle s of latitude by parallel straight lines a d^t 
 ang es to the mendians, but of which the distances from 
 each other mcrease in going north or south from the 
 equator m such a proportion as always to give the t ue 
 hearings of places from one another. 
 
 The third method is to suppose a portion of the earth's 
 surface to be a portion of the surface of a cone whose 
 axis coincides with that of the earth, and whose ve ex 
 somewhere beyond the pole, while its surface cuts or 
 ouches the sphere at certain points. The conical sur 
 ace as then supposed to be developed as a plane. whTh 
 It of course admits of being. The only conical develop 
 
 as tfte ordinary polyconic." 
 
 in l\L°''"'Tf"' '''°'""°'' '^ ''"P'y ""= °"= employed 
 in plans and elevations. When used for the delineat on 
 of a spheneal surface the eye is supposed ,0 be a an "n 
 fin, e distance, so that the rays of ifgh. are para 1 1 the 
 P^ane of projection being perpendicular ,„ their direc ion 
 
 eitner that of the equator or ol a meridian. When a hemi 
 sphere ,s projected on its base in this manner the rela.™ 
 positions of points near the centre are given w'h o r 
 able accuracy, but those near the circumference are com 
 
 dtdutd ^'T'^'- ^"l'^"^ °f "- P.ojection arTs": 
 deduced. Amongst others it is evident that in the case 
 of a hemisphere projected on its base ail circles pL,n. 
 through the pole of the hemisphere are p o ected »« 
 straight lines intersecting at the centre. CircTes hti I'g 
 heir plane, parallel to that of ,he base are projected I*" 
 equal circles. All other circles are projected as e fin 
 of wh,cl, the greater axis is equal to the' dia„,e r o T 
 
 r':;3:,":'or:b^u!.7 
 
 ^Xi 
 
!l 
 
 
 i68 
 
 Projections. 
 
 Stereographic Projedion.—ln this projection the eye is 
 supposed to be situated at the surface of the sphere, and 
 the plane of the projection is that of the great circle 
 which is every where 90 degrees from the position of the 
 eye. It derives its name from the fact that it results from 
 the intersection of two solids, the cone and the sphere. 
 Its principal properties are the following: i. The pro- 
 jection of any circle on the sphere which does not pass 
 through the eye is a circle; and circles whose planes 
 pass through the eye are straight lines. 2. The angle 
 made on the surface of the sphere by two circles which 
 cut each other and the angle made by their projections 
 are equal. 3. If C is the pole of the point of sight and c 
 its projection; then any point A is projected into a point a 
 such that c a is equal to 
 
 tan (arc CA 
 
 rx 
 
 ..„ — I — 
 
 -S 
 
 where r is the radius of the sphere. From the second 
 property it follows that any very small portion of the 
 spherical surface and its projection are similar figures ; a 
 property of great importance in the construction of maps, 
 and one which is also shared by Mercator's projection. 
 
 The astronomical triangle FZS can evidently be easily 
 drawn on the stereographic projection. Z will be the 
 pole of the point of sight. The lengths of ZP and ZS 
 are straight lines found by the rule given above, and the 
 angle Z being known the points P and S are known. 
 The angles P and S being also known we can draw the 
 circular curve PS by a simple construction. 
 
 The orthographic and stereographic projections were 
 both employed by the ancient Greek astronomers for the 
 purpose of representing the celestial sphere, with its 
 circles, on a plane. 
 
 Gnomonic or Central Projection. — In this case the eye is 
 at the centre of the sphere, and the plane of projection is 
 
Projections. 
 
 i6g 
 
 a-plane touching the sphere at any assumed point. The 
 projection of any point is the extremity of the tangent of 
 the arc intercepted between that point and the point of 
 contact. As the tangent increases very rapidly when the 
 arc IS more than 45°, and becomes infinite at go*, it is evi- 
 dent that this projection cannot be adopted for a whole 
 hemisphere. 
 
 Globular Projection.— This is a device to avoid the dis 
 tort.on which occurs in the above projections as we 
 approach the circumference of the hemisphere. In the 
 accompanying figure let A C B 
 be the hemisphere to be repre- 
 sented on the plane A B, E 
 the position of the eye, O the 
 centre of the sphere, and EDOC 
 perpendicular to the plane A B. 
 M and F are points on the 
 sphere, and their projections are 
 N and G. Now the representa- 
 tion would be perfect if A N : 
 N G : G O were as A M : M F : 
 F C. This cannot be obtained Fig. 39, 
 
 .^'^^^y^;.^"* ''' ^^'''1 ^« approximately so if the point E 
 IS so diown that G is t!.e middle point of A O and F the 
 middle point of A C. In this case, by joining F O and 
 drawing F L perpendicular to O C, it may easily be shown 
 that L D ,s equal to O L, which is O Fxcos 45" or 
 rxo.71 nearly.-M«.««^ G O is half the radius and F L 
 halt the inscribed square— tfeererfase 
 FL:GO::OC:OL 
 but F L: GO::LE ; O E 
 .-.LE : O E::OC : OL 
 
 consequently, LO : O ■• : . C L : O L, or O L^.=0 E C L 
 but O L^=.F L»=D .. L C, .-. O E. C L^D L. C L 
 
 or O E-»D L 
 that is, E D—O L 
 
I 
 
 170 
 
 Projections. 
 
 The above projections are seldom used for delineating 
 the features of a single country or a small portion of the 
 earth's surface. For this purpose it is more convenient 
 to employ one of the methods of development. 
 
 Mercator's Projection is the method employed in the 
 construction of nautical charts. The meridians are repre- 
 sented by equi-distant parallel straight lines, and the 
 parallels of latitude by straight lines perpendicular to ^he 
 meridians. As we recede from the equator towards the 
 poles the distances between the parallels of latitude on the 
 map are made to increase at the same rate that the scale 
 of the distance between points east and west of each 
 other increases on the map, owing to the meridians being 
 drawn parallel instead of converging. If we take / as the 
 length of a degree of longitude at the equator (which 
 would be the same as a degree of latitude supposing the 
 earth a sphere), and /' that of a degree of longitude at 
 latitude ;, then /'-/ cos >^, or /'.•/:: i : sec ;. Now 
 /.' : / is the proportion in which the length of a given dis- 
 tance in longitude has been increased on the map by 
 making the meridians parallel, and is therefore the pro- 
 portion in which the distance between the parallels of 
 latitude must be increased. It is evident that the poles 
 can never be shown on this projection, as they would be 
 at an infinite distance from the equator. 
 
 If a ship steers a fixed course by the compass this 
 course is always a straight line on a Mercator's chart. 
 Great circles on the globe are projected as curves, except 
 in the case of meridians and the equator. 
 
 In this projection, though the scale increases as we 
 approach the poles, the map of a limited tract of country 
 gives places in their correct relative positions. 
 
 The Ordinary Polyconic Projection.—In conical develop- 
 ments of the sphere a polygon is supposed to be inscribed 
 in a meridian. By revolution about the polar axis the 
 
 vxmf-sss.^i^^ifi.fi^,^, 
 
Projections. 
 
 171 
 
 polygon will describe a series of frustums of cones, li 
 the arc of the curve equals its chord the two surfaces wilF 
 be equal. In this manner the spherical surface may be 
 looked upon as formed by the intersection of an infinite 
 number of cones tangential to the surface along succes- 
 sive parallels of latitude. These conical surfaces may be 
 developed on a plane, and the properties of the resulting 
 chart will depend on the law of the development. 
 
 The Ordinary Polyconic is a projection much used in 
 the United States Coast Survey. It is peculiarly appli- 
 cable to the case where the chart embraces considerable 
 difference in latitude with only a moderate amplitude of 
 longitude, as it is independent of change of latitude. 
 
 Before describing it it must be noted that whatever 
 projection is used the spheroidal figure of the earth must 
 be taken into account, its surface being that which would 
 be formed by the revolution of a nearly circular ellipse 
 round the polar axis as a minor axis. 
 
 In the Ordinary Polyconic each parallel of latitude is 
 represented on a plane by the development of a cone 
 haying the parallel for its base, and its vertex at the 
 point where a tangent to a meridian at the parallel in- 
 tersects the earth's axis, the degrees on the parallel pre- 
 serving their true length. A straight line running north 
 and south represents the middle meridian on the chart, 
 and is made equal to its rectified arc according to scale.' 
 The conical elements are developed equally on each 
 side of this meridian, and are disposed in arcs of circles 
 described (in the case of the sphere) with radii equal to 
 the radius of the sphere multiplied by the cotangent of 
 the latitude. The centres of these arcs lie in the middle 
 meridian produced, each arc cutting it at its proper 
 latitude. 
 
 These elements evidently touch each other only at the 
 middle meridian, diverging as they leave it. The curva- 
 
 / 
 
 . -SCTssssTjiBaBSsM:, 
 
I.l 
 
 172 
 
 Projections. 
 
 tureofthe parallels decreases as the distance from the 
 poles increases, till at the equator the parallel becomes a 
 straight line. 
 
 To trace the meridians we set off on the different 
 parallels (accordinfj to the usual law for the length of an 
 arc of longitude) the true points where each meridian 
 cuts them, and draw curves connecting those points. 
 
 To allow for the ellipticity of the earth we must use for 
 the radius of the developed parallel N cot /, where 
 
 N= 
 
 a 
 
 (i—e^ sin 3 /)J^ 
 
 a being the equatorial radius, e the eccentricity, N the 
 normal terminating in the minor axis, and / the ar >!« it 
 makes with the major axis. 
 
 It is evident that 
 the slant height of the 
 cone— say y— is N cot /, 
 and that the radius 
 of the parallel on the 
 spheroid is N cos /. 
 The length of an arc 
 of M° of a parallel will 
 
 be »°-^o N cos /. 
 
 In practice, instead Fig. 40 
 
 of describing the arcs of the parallels with radii, it is more 
 
 IZrV"- T''''''' *'^" ^^°- ^^^'^ ^<i-tLs 
 
 r n 1 w '"^'^^'^'^'^^^^^ the meridians and parallels 
 can also be found in this way. Express . and ;., the ec 
 angular co-ordinates of a point, as function of the 
 
 (6)7 f.U 'r ^'P'' P^^^"^' (^ -t ^) -d the angle 
 iff) that this radius makes with the middle meridian 
 
 ■^ 
 
 i 
 
 1!^ 
 
 ■J^*lf'im 
 
 
i 
 
 Fig. 41 
 
 (I) 
 (2) 
 
 PyojecHuns. 
 
 Take the origin at L» 
 (Fig. 41) the point of in-f 
 tersection of a piirallel || 
 with the middle meridian; 
 the middle meridian as 
 the axis of _y; and ilie per- 
 pendicular throngh L as 
 the axis of x. Tlien we 
 shall have for any point P 
 whose latitude is / and 
 longitude from the meri- 
 dian n° 
 
 ^=-Y Psin /?=-N cot /sin ^ 
 :v— Y P versin ^=N cot / versin d 
 being, of course, some function of «. 
 
 To find the relation between d and n, since the parallels 
 are developed with their true lengths the distance LP 
 
 :phetid T^f 'T ^^'■'°" LP^f ^'-parallel :: \l 
 spheio.d Therefore the angles at the centres of the two 
 arcs will be mversely proportional to the radii, and 
 N^ot^/_ «• 
 
 N cos r~~d~' °^ ^^"° s'" ^ (3) 
 
 These three equations are sufficient to projerf any 
 point of the spheroid when we know its latitude and its 
 longitude from the middle meridian. If we take n con 
 stant we can project the successive points of any meri- 
 
 frn^^l.'' the distance on the elliptical middle meridian 
 from the ongm to the point where the parallel through 
 
 tion (2) will become, ^=N cot / versin ^±S. 
 
j '1 
 
 HI 
 
 174 
 
 Projections. 
 
 From the abov^ equations 
 tables may be formed for the 
 construction of charts. 
 
 Fij^. 42 sliovvs the geometri- 
 cal relation between the angles 
 ^ and n. 
 
 This projection, when the 
 amplitude in longitude does not 
 exceed three degrees from the 
 middle meridian, has the fol- Pig- 42 
 
 lowing properties. 
 
 It distorts very little, and has great uniformity of scale. 
 
 It is well adapted to all parts of the earth, but best to 
 the polar regions. 
 
 The meridians nrik." practically the same angles with 
 each other and wiu; ;[.!. parallels as on the sphere. Angles 
 are projected with .i:tde change. 
 
 The great circle . r geodesic line is projected as a 
 straight line practically equal to itself. 
 
 ■ 
 
 1. 
 
•■ 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 scale, 
 est to 
 
 i with 
 Angles 
 
 I as a 
 
 TliMONOMETRlCAL LEV EL LI NO. 
 TO FIND THE HEIGHT OF A POINT B ABOVE A STATION A. 
 
 In the accompanying figure 
 O is the centre of the earth, 
 AC is • mgential tf» the earth's 
 snrfa. at A, B' is the apparent 
 position of B, owing to refrac- 
 tion. CC is the correction for 
 
 K» 
 
 curvature, or- „ , wliere K is 
 2 R 
 
 the horizontal distance of B 
 
 from A, and R is the radius of ^''> 43- 
 
 the earth ; both in feet. BB' is about 0.16 CC 
 
 ACB may be taken as a right angle; and AC*, the arc 
 AC, and the straight line AC, ar e"alt equal?' We shall 
 have then, if - th e dint finr" K ii mi l ii 111 {j i'- U t. 
 
 BC=K tan B'AC + CC-BB' 
 ^K tan B 'AC + 0.00000002 K^ 
 
 where B'AC is the observed angle of elevation of B. This 
 formula supposes that AC'B is practically o^' If the dis- 
 
 ^.O-A.'*'*/ 
 
 \ 
 

 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-S) 
 
 /. 
 
 .? 
 
 
 C^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 / 
 
 A 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 |50 "^B 
 
 ^ b£ 12.0 
 
 2.5 
 
 11-25 II 1.4 
 
 A-KX^l-V^ 
 
 rtograpnic 
 Sdences 
 Corporation 
 
 1.6 
 
 23 WEST MAi.: STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, NY. 14580 
 
 (7)6) 872-4503 
 
 
 
 
// 
 
 ^A, 
 
 .v^^ 
 
 4 ^, V 
 
 ^0 
 
 K<^^ 
 
 ^1^ 
 
i \ 
 
 176 
 
 Trigonometrical Levelling. 
 
 tance is so great that this is not the case we shall have 
 in the triangle ACB 
 
 ,sin BAG 
 
 BC=K- 
 
 sin B 
 
 To find the angle B, we have in the triangle AOB, 
 B=i8o=-(0+BAO) 
 =180— (0 + 90° + BAG) 
 =- 90— (O + BAG) 
 Hence, sin B=-cos (0+BAG) 
 
 sin BAG 
 
 BG=Kx 
 
 cos (b + BAG) 
 And BG'-=BG + GG'-BG + 
 
 2K 
 
 (<vhere R4s the radius of the earth in. feet.) 
 
 The angle O, in minutes, is 0.0001646 K, and 
 K2 
 
 ^ is 0.000000023936 K2 
 
 REFRAC- 
 
 RECIPROCAL OBSERVATIONS FOR CANXELLING 
 
 TION, 
 
 If we measure the reciprocal angles of elevation and de- 
 / pression of two stations— in other words, if at each 
 
 ^ we observe the ;;cnith distance of the other— we shall get 
 nd of the effects of refrac- 
 tion. Let a he the angle 
 of elevation of B at A and 
 A? the angle of depression 
 of A at B. 
 
 Then 
 BG'— Kx 
 
 sm I (« + /5) 
 cos A {a+l^-fo) 
 
 If the zenith distances 
 are observed call them «Jand 
 d', and we shall have (since 
 ^-^90° — a and <J'=-9o°+^J) 
 
 ^'A''- i4' 
 
 'lE?ftn 
 
shall have 
 
 AOB. 
 
 Trigonometrical Levelling. 
 
 177 
 
 REFRAC- 
 
 n and cle- 
 at each 
 shall get 
 
 cos^id'—8+0) 
 
 If O is very small compared with the other angles we 
 may neglect it, when we shall have 
 
 BC'=.K tan ^ (a+/9) 
 ==K tan I (d'—d)* 
 
 REDUCTION TO THE SUMMITS OF THE SIGNALS. 
 
 Suppose there are two stations, a and b, which cannot 
 be seen from each other, so that 
 signals have to be e.'ected at 
 each. Lei A and B be the sum- 
 mits of the signals, f/. and ^5 the 
 true angles of elevation [and de- 
 pression of a and b respectively. 
 At ci the angle B <{ C is observed 
 and at b the angle A b D. Call 
 H^'C,^^; AbD,,/';Aa,h; and 
 B b, h'. Then, to find the re- 
 duced angles « and /? we shall 
 have 
 
 „ ti h cos tp 
 Ksm I 
 ,3 Ji' cos d) 
 
 ''^^+Ksinr 
 
 P'g- 45- 
 
 the differences being in seconds. 
 If zenith distances A and A ' are taken we shall have 
 
 *Clarke gives the formula 
 
 h'~h=K tan i {8:—d) {i-|-^^l 
 
 where h and h' are the heights of the stations, and r the 
 radius of the earth. 
 
I 
 
 n 
 ill 
 
 
 178 
 
 Trigonometrical Levelling. 
 
 for d and d' 
 
 5= A + 
 
 d'=A'-i 
 
 h sin A 
 K sin I" 
 h' sin A ' 
 
 K sin i' 
 
 Reciprocal observations ought to be simultaneous in 
 / order that the effects of refraction may be as nearly as 
 possible the same for both. 
 
 In problems of this kind we ought, strictly speaking, 
 instead of using the mean radius of the earth, to take the 
 normal for the mean latitude of the stations. 
 
 The following geodetical formulce are used for more 
 exact determinations. In addition to the letters used in 
 the foregoing problems we have a the known altitude of 
 the lower station ; N the normal for the mean latitude ; 
 M the modulus of common logarithms; and r the co- 
 efficient of refraction. 
 
 1. TO FIND THE DIFFERENCE OF LEVEL BY RECIPROCAL 
 
 .''ENITH DISTANCES. 
 
 Log. diff. oflevel=log jKtan J (d'—i 
 
 ^ 
 
 2. TO FIND THE DIFFERENCE OF LEVEL BY MEANS OF A 
 SINGLE ZENITH DISTANCE. 
 
 Log. diff. level = log. 
 
 M 
 
 K 
 
 tan 
 
 f « I — 2 r 
 
 V 2 N sin I" 
 
 K 
 
 N 2 N 
 
 K 
 
 M 
 
 tnr. ^^ i~2 r „ ) ~i2 N» 
 
 tan 1 a -— , — „ K ,- 
 
 i 2 N sm I J 
 
 K' 
 
 The third term is positive if A is less than 9^ 
 
 Ml 
 
 r.T.itiCTra; ffleaw 
 
Trigonometrical Levelling. 
 
 179 
 
 3. TO ASCERTAIN THE HEIGHT OF A STATION BY MEANS OF 
 THE ZEMTH DISTANCE OF THE SEA HORIZON. 
 
 In this case, wh-n possible, different points of the hori- 
 zon should be observed on different days and the mean 
 of the whole taken, the state of the tide being also noted. 
 
 The formula is 
 
 Log. altitude=log-^{-^^|"+iog. (^-go")^ 
 , M / sin I* ) • . 
 
 The angle d— 90* is in seconds. 
 The last term may generally be neglected. 
 
 The following is an example of finding the difference of 
 level by a single zenith distance. 
 
 The altitude of the lower station (a) wtf :ooo yards, 
 and h or the height of the instrument 5. 
 
 The horizontal distance between the stations (K) was 
 57836 yards. The zenith distance of the upper station 
 (A) 88* 24' 40". 
 
 First, to find the value of the angle d. 
 
 Log h :o. 69897 
 
 Log sin A =9.99984 
 
 Co-log K -115. 23780 
 
 Co-log sin i"=5.37443 
 
 Log 
 
 h sin A 
 
 K sin V"^^ -^5 104= log I7-.8 
 Therefore 5=88° 24' 57".8 
 
 Next, to find the value of the angle 
 
 1—2 r 
 
 Log 
 
 I — 2 r 
 
 2 N>rY" =^'^3252 
 
 Log K =4.76220 
 
 2 N sin i' 
 
 K 
 
 I — 2 r 
 
 2.89472=log 784''7=o° 13' 4".7 
 
 2 N sin I " ^-^^° ^'' 53".i 
 
I 
 
 i8o 
 
 Trigonometrical Levelling. 
 
 Thirdly, value of the difference of level. 
 Log K =4.7621984 
 Log tan 88" ir 53".! =1.5022427 
 
 Log ist term=3.2599557 
 2nd terni= 691 
 
 3rd term= +627 
 4th term= 9 
 
 Second Term. 
 
 Log^= 28393 
 Log a =3 
 
 Log 2nd term = 5-8393 
 
 2nd term = 0.000069 1 
 
 Log. diff. Ievel=3-26oo884=log 1820.07 yards. 
 
 Third Term. 
 
 Log ^^3.538 
 2 N 
 log I St term = 3 2599 
 
 log3rdterm=57982 
 3rd term =00000627 
 
 REFRACTION, die. 
 
 Fourth Term. 
 
 34387 
 
 Log _M 
 
 I 2 N'J 
 
 log Ks =95244 
 
 log 4th term = 2 9631 
 4th term =0-0000009 
 
 TO FIND THE CO-EFFICIENT OF TERRESTRIAL REFRAC- 
 TION BY RECIPROCAL OBSERVATIONS OF 2EN1TH 
 DISTANCES. 
 
 Let A and B be two sta- 
 tions, and let their heights 
 (ascertained by levelling) be 
 h and h'. Consider the earth 
 as a sphere, and take O' its 
 centre. Call the radius r and 
 the angle AOB v. Let Z be 
 the true zenith distance of B 
 at A, viz., ZAB, and Z' that of 
 A at B or Z'BA. The dotted 
 curve shows the path of the 
 ray of light. A' and B' are the 
 apparent positions of the sta- 
 tions. 
 
 P'g- 46. 
 
 / The co-efficient of refraction is the ratio of the differ- 
 U ence between the observed and real zenith distance at 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 1 
 
07 yards. 
 
 Term. 
 
 =34387 
 =95244 
 
 1 = 29631 
 
 = O'000OOO9 
 
 REFRAC- 
 2ENITH 
 
 differ- 
 nce at 
 
 Trigonometrical Levelling. 
 
 181 
 
 either station to the angle v. Thus, if A is the co-effici.^ 
 and z 2 the observed zenith distances, we have k equal to 
 
 L — Z Z' — zi 
 
 But these are not always the same. 
 
 -or 
 
 V V 
 
 In the triangle AOB we have 
 
 2 
 
 tan —tan ^ (Z— Z)= 
 
 h' + 2 r+h 
 
 These equations give 2 and Z. 
 
 If we substitute for tan^ the first two terms of its ex- 
 pansion in w«^s; the second equation may be put in the 
 form 
 
 h'—h=s tan i (Z'—Z) 
 
 2 r 
 
 — [ 
 
 izr*) 
 
 where s is the length of AB projected on the sea level. 
 
 The co-efficient of refraction may also be obtained from 
 the si.nultaneous reciprocally-observed zenith distances 
 ot A and B without knowing their heights. Thus : 
 
 Z=z + k V, and Z'—.z' + k v 
 •: e+z'+2 k i'^i8o°-f y 
 
 or 1-2 k='±'-J^^l 
 
 V 
 
 The mean co-efficient is .0771. For rays crossing the 
 sea It 13 .o8og, and for rays not crossing it .0750. 
 
 The amount of terrestrial refraction is verv variable 
 and not to be expressed by any single law. In flat, hot 
 countries where the rays of light have to pass near the 
 ground and through masses of atmosphere of different 
 densities the irregularity of the refraction is very great- 
 so much so that the path of the rays is sometimes 
 <-onvex to the surface of the earth instead of concave In 
 Great Britain the refraction is, as a rule, greatest in the 
 early mornings ; towards the middle of the day it de- 
 creases and remains nearly constant for some hours, in- 
 creasing again towards evening. 
 
: 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 THE USE OF THE PENDULUM IN DETERMININO THE 
 COMPIiEtiSION OF THE EARTH. 
 
 The spheroidal form of the earth causes the force of 
 gravity to increase from the equator towards the poles, 
 and this force may be measured at any place by means of 
 the oscillations of a pendulum. 
 
 If we had a heavy particle suspended from a fixed 
 point by a fine inextensible thread without weight we 
 should have what is called a simple pendulum. If this 
 pendulum were allowed to make small oscillations (of not 
 more than a degree in amplitude) in vacuo, and in a ver- 
 tical plane, the time of oscillation would be given by the 
 formula 
 
 Iff ) 
 
 Where / is tho number of seconds, / the length of the 
 pendulum in feet, and g the force of gravity. 
 
 Therefore, taking^ as constant, if there were another 
 pendulum /' feet long and vibrating in t' seconds, we 
 should have 
 
 t:t".:\/l: 4//' 
 or, if the time were constant and g changed to g', 
 
Pendulum Observations. 
 
 or HI were constant and ^ variable 
 
 ft'" -. ' 
 
 If « and n are the number of osci 
 i^mti, then, »': M::^.^' 
 
 From (2) we have, ir'=-^/r 
 
 _n2 
 
 „8^ 
 
 183 
 
 nations in tfee time y^ 
 
 (3) 
 
 rnelLremluhetlhX"^' T'/ ^'T^ *'^^^^^^^^" ^^ 
 tain number o os^ £^^^ P'"'"'""! '^^' ^^^^^^ ^er- 
 
 what ar/called "c;rou^d>f^° H 7' """"'^ ''^'^'' "= 
 sible .0 calculate theleZh I ^ """f' """ " '^ P"'" 
 would oscillate in .he same it a-".'lT ""'"'"T "■=" 
 by finding the position ^0^ "cLt ! 0?™''°^''- ™'' 
 
 wou',^.h:;:::d'^rr 7? ^^^^^—^^ 
 
 and if a pent Z t '''r?" "'= '"'"^''angeable, 
 
 '--eco^™r.trri::r:z,^'----e 
 is "er-r„:r.^t^,rdr^^^^^^^^^^^^^ -j ^ - 
 
 have, by the formula ^n^olt ctva^t^T^rm " "' 
 
 S~g [i+(|w-0sin2yj 
 and, since ;^' "' 
 
 n" 
 
 fi. if « is the number of oscillations in 
 
i ^ I 
 
 i 
 
 184 
 
 Pendulum Observations. 
 
 a given time at the equator and »' the numbert at the 
 station. 
 
 n 
 
 r 
 
 'a—ns [iMi '"— ^) sin" <p) 
 
 (4) 
 
 Also,^' J- g 
 
 :. if we take the lengths of the seconds pendulums in- 
 stead of the number of their oscillations, we have 
 
 /'=/ [I + (I ,n—c) sin>] (5) 
 
 I being the length of the pendulum at the equator, m 
 being known, and » n', or / /', being found by experiment, 
 we at once get the value of c from equation (4) or (5). 
 
 Borda's pendulum, which was used by the French 
 astronomers to find the length of the second's pendulum 
 (that is, a pendulum oscillating in a single second) at dif- 
 ferent stations, consisted of a sphere of platinum sus- 
 pended by a fine wire, attached to the upper end of 
 which was a knife edge of steel resting on a level agate 
 plane. The length of the simple pendulum corresponding 
 to Borda's was obtained by measurement and calculation. 
 
 In 1818 Captain Kater determined the length of the 
 seconds pendulum in London (39-13929 inches) by means 
 of a pendulum which had two knife edges facing each 
 other— one for the centre of suspension, the other at the 
 centre of oscillation— so that, provided the two knife 
 edges were at the correct distance apart, they could be 
 used indifferently as points of suspension ; the pendulum 
 being, of course, inverted in the two positions. The 
 pendulum was made to swing equally from either point of 
 suspension by adjusting a sliding weight. The distance 
 between the two edges gave the length of the simple pen- 
 dulum. 
 
 The advantage of such a pendulum is that it contains 
 two in one, and that any injury to the instrument is de- 
 tected by its giving different results when swung in the 
 two positions. This pendulum was afterwards super- 
 seded by another of similar principle, in which, instead of 
 
}er» at the 
 (4) 
 
 dulums in- 
 ave 
 
 (5) 
 qaator. m 
 ixperiment, 
 ) or (5). 
 
 he French 
 5 pendulum 
 ;oiid) at dif- 
 itinum sus- 
 per end of 
 level agate 
 rresponding 
 calculation, 
 igth of the 
 s) by means 
 facing each 
 5ther at the 
 ! two knife 
 2y could be 
 e pendulum 
 tions. The 
 her point of 
 'he distance 
 simple pen- 
 it contains 
 ment is de- 
 ATung in the 
 ards super- 
 I, instead of 
 
 Pendulum Observations. 
 
 185 
 
 using a "^liding weight, one end of the bar of which it 
 consisted was filed away until the vibrations in the two 
 positions were synchronous. In using the pendulum it is 
 swung in front of the pendulum of an astronomical clock, 
 the exact rate of which is known. By means of certain 
 contrivances the number of vibrations made by the two 
 pendulums in a given time can be compared exactly, and 
 the number made by the clock being known that of the 
 experimental pendulum is obtained. Certain corrections 
 have to be applied. One for changes in the thermometer, 
 which lengthen or shorten the pendulum : a second for 
 changes in barometric pressure, which by altering the 
 floatation effect of the atmosphere on the instrument, 
 affect the action of gravity on it ; a third for height of 
 station above the sea level, which also affects the force of 
 gravity, the latter diminishing with the square of the 
 distance from the centre of the earth ; and a fourth for 
 the amplitude of the arc through which the pendulum 
 swings, which, in theory, should be indefinitely small. 
 
 The number of pendulum oscillations in a given time 
 has been observed at a vast number of stations in various 
 parts of the world, and in latitudes from the equator to 
 nearly 80". The most extensive series of observations 
 was one lately brought to a close in India, the pendulums 
 used in which had been previor; ;, tested at Kew. The 
 general results of all the pen iiilum experiments gives 
 about 292 : 293 as the ratio of the earth's axes, which is 
 the same as that deduced from measurements of meri- 
 dianal arcs. 
 
 L 
 
 L 
 
 I